Commit graph

2948 commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
Jouni Malinen
d03e8d118c nl80211: Merge ap_isolate configuration into nl80211_set_bss()
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-03 11:43:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e53a0c7406 Fix a typo in a comment
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-12-03 11:38:51 +02:00
Szymon Bigos
9337e876ab Fix generated WPS PIN values to use zero-padding
The dynamically generated PINs are supposed to have 8 digits, but
some PIN generatation cases were not zero-padding these properly.
2011-12-02 23:04:39 +02:00
Bharat Chakravarty
8e5f913456 WPS: Allow RF Bands value to be overridden
A new hostapd.conf parameter, wps_rf_bands, can now be used to fix the
RF Bands value in cases where hw_mode is not set or when operating a
dual band dual concurrent AP.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-30 17:44:43 +02:00
Subrat Dash
910b482d9b WPS: Fix stopping of active WPS operation on dual concurrent AP
When hostapd controls multiple radios, WPS operations are started on
all interfaces. However, when the provisioning run had been completed
successfully, actiove WPS mode was stopped only a single interface. Fix
this to iterate through all interfaces so that this is handled
consistently with the starting of WPS operation.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-30 16:48:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d6d731b848 WPS ER: Fix segfault in some selected registrar change cases
Commit 628d54639a introduced number
of new WPS related ctrl_iface messages to hostapd. Some of these
were for ER events which do not make any sense to hostapd that
cannot operate as an ER. The WPS_EV_ER_SET_SELECTED_REGISTRAR one
from wps_registrar_sel_registrar_changed_event() was especially
problematic since it can cause wpa_supplicant ER code segfault due
to missing event data.

Revert all the ER specific changes from commit
628d54639a to get rid of the segfault
and undesired extra code in hostapd.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-30 14:44:23 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
216eede830 Android: nl80211: Add Android specific PNO configuration
This is based on the Android driver_cmd changes that are converted to
use the sched_scan/stop_sched_scan driver_ops for the case where the
driver does not support the new nl80211 commands.

Change-Id: Iaedc340f84650af422bd2ea57d2a8b0a9d4a5330
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-11-29 15:18:52 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
5eb429101a Android: wext: Add sched_scan functions for PNO
(jm: This is based on the Android change that used driver_cmd. The same
implementation is used for the actual driver interface, but the commands
are now accessed through sched_scan/stop_sched_scan driver_ops instead
of driver_cmd)
2011-11-29 15:18:45 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
06e356fe14 Android: wext: Add driver state events 2011-11-29 15:18:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
363ab44067 EAP-AKA: Use strdup instead of strlen + malloc + memcpy
While the copy is not used as a null terminated string, this can prevent
some static analyzers from complaining about non-issue.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:45:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0ac6c3f71a EAP-PEAP: Remove unused hdr assignment
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:43:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
864a8e3bf6 EAP-PSK: Fix memory leak on error path
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:41:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cdc6e5d084 TLS: Add support for SHA256-based cipher suites from RFC 5246
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:33:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1622b331f6 TLS: Update file headers to include TLS v1.2 support
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:13:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a838e71ccf Include TLS v1.1 and v1.2 support in library build
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:08:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4b919be289 TLS: Allow TLS v1.2 to be negotiated
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:08:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f0b1c5f7b3 TLS: Add TLS v1.2 style CertificateVerify functionality
Add support for generating and verifying RFC 3447 RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5
style DigestInfo for TLS v1.2 CertificateVerify. For now, this is
hardcoded to only support SHA256-based digest.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:08:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
949b2e1f61 TLS: Add SHA256-based verify_data derivation for TLS v1.2
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 22:08:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
20b4cdcd41 TLS: Maintain SHA256-based hash values for TLS v1.2
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:48:34 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ca84eed7ad TLS: Add build configuration for TLS v1.2 support
This allows the internal TLS implementation to be built for TLS v1.2
support. In addition to the build option, this changes the TLS PRF
based on the negotiated version number. Though, this commit does not
yet complete support for TLS v1.2.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:45:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bcf03f5209 TLS: Assume explicit IV for TLS v1.1 and newer
This is needed to allow TLS v1.2 to be supported.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:38:25 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6c67d77fef TLS: Increase maximum MAC key from 20 to 32 octets
This is in prepartion of adding support for SHA256-based operations
with TLS v1.2.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:36:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d0485a6208 TLS: Pass version to tls_prf() in preparation for new PRFs
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:35:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cd52acec85 Rename tls_prf() to tls_prf_sha1_md5()
Prepare for multiple TLS PRF functions by renaming the SHA1+MD5 based
TLS PRF function to more specific name and add tls_prf() within the
internal TLS implementation as a wrapper for this for now.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:27:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ebe4e8f814 TLS: Add helper functions for version number handling
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:20:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8307489840 Add implementation of TLS v1.2 PRF (P_SHA256)
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:10:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dcff088df7 Add SHA256-hash functions to generic crypto_hash_* functions
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 21:10:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e770c497eb TLS: Add a debug information on unsupported private key format
Provide easier to understand reason for failure to use the old
OpenSSL encrypted private key format.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-27 13:21:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
527a398866 wext: Define some new values if linux/wireless.h is too old
IW_ENCODE_ALG_PMK and IW_ENC_CAPA_4WAY_HANDSHAKE are not defined in the
Android tree, so add compatibility defines for these.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-25 23:56:15 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
8a5e75f60f P2P: Send STA connected/disconnected events to parent ctrl_iface
Send the connection events from P2P group to both the group interface
and parent interface ctrl_ifaces to make it easier for external monitor
programs to see these events without having to listen to all group
interfaces when virtual group interfaces are used.

Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-11-25 23:56:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fb67eec6f8 nl80211: Do not set sched_scan filter if driver does not support it
cfg80211 will reject the NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN if too many
match sets are requested. To avoid being completely unable to start
any scheduled scans, skip setting these filters if the driver did
not advertise support for large enough number of match sets.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-25 17:46:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
29f338af26 nl80211: Implement set_p2p_powersave for legacy_ps changes
This adds initial implementation of set_p2p_powersave to allow legacy PS
mode to be configured. P2P PS parameters are not yet supported.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-25 13:11:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0bf927a03e Use wpa_key_mgmt_*() helpers
This cleans up the source code and makes it less likely that new AKM
addition misses some needed changes in the future.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-24 22:47:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
71093e5ea9 WPS: Include WSC IE in (Re)Association Response for maybe-WPS case
If the station is indicating use of WPS, WSC IE should be added into the
(Re)Association Response frame. This is clear for the case when WSC IE
was included in the (Re)Association Request frame. However, even the
WLAN_STA_MAYBE_WPS case may actually indicate use of WPS. Assume that to
be the case when WPA/WPA2 is enabled (i.e., when the STA does not
include WPA/RSN/WSC IE while AP has WPA/RSN enabled).

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-24 22:05:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1323ee314e Move wpa_sm_remove_pmkid() call to PMKSA cache entry freeing
This makes it clearer that the PMKSA caching entry gets removed from
the driver regardless of how the internal entry from wpa_supplicant
gets cleared. In practice, this call was skipped only for the case
when the entry for the current AP was being updated, so the previous
version was likely to work with all drivers. Anyway, it is cleaner
to explicitly remove the old entry even in that case before the new
entry gets added.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-20 12:53:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bf689a409f Fix wired EAPOL authenticator
Commit 940a0ce970 moved the STA associated
check from driver_*.c into ieee802_1x_receive(), but failed to take into
account that wired networks and driver_wired.c do not mark the STA entry
associated. Fix this by skipping the check if the driver wrapper is
using a wired network.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-20 12:42:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d5cbee412c Avoid possible compiler warning in os_gmtime()
Use time_t instead of os_time_t variable with the gmtime() call to
avoid possible compiler warnings.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-20 12:19:28 +02:00
Johannes Berg
88df0ef74f nl80211: Set offchannel-OK selectively
It's not really valid to send off-channel in all cases,
so pass whether it should be allowed or not and don't
set it in the AP case.

Also, to get the right ifindex for hostapd, pass a bss
pointer instead of the drv pointer.

Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-19 19:56:34 +02:00
Johannes Berg
221a59c9b6 nl80211: Move preq NL handle into BSS
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-19 19:48:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ddc5327139 nl80211: Add no_ack support for NL80211_CMD_FRAME
This is needed to allow no-ACK operation with Probe Response frames
in P2P Listen state.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-19 19:32:05 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
fab2533604 nl80211: Implement noack policy for send_mlme
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-11-19 19:22:13 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
9a898ee879 Avoid excessive probe response retries
Some client implementations only wait a few ms after sending a probe
request while scanning. Since probe responses are always sent at a low
rate this can eat quite some airtime and it might be impossible to get
the frame out before the client leaves the channel again. If the client
leaves before all probe reponses where acked this can cause the probe
reponse to be retried quite often consuming even more airtime.

Hence, add a new noack flag to the driver's send_mlme callback that
allows hostapd to request whether the driver should expect an ACK for
this frame or not.

Use the new noack-policy only for broadcast probe requests that contain
a wildcard SSID.

Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-11-19 19:09:49 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
8cfa3527e1 Allow MLME frames to be sent without expecting an ACK (no retries)
In some situations it might be benefical to send a unicast frame without
the need for getting it ACKed (probe responses for example). In order to
achieve this add a new noack parameter to the drivers send_mlme callback
that can be used to advise the driver to not wait for an ACK for this
frame.

Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-11-19 19:02:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5419d6afed EAP-pwd: Remove struct eap_pwd_hdr
This structure was not really used for anything apart from figuring out
length of the EAP-pwd header (and even that in a way that would not work
with fragmentation). Since the bitfields in the structure could have
been problematic depending on target endianness, remove this unnecessary
structure.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-19 16:52:52 +02:00
Dan Harkins
e547e071e1 EAP-pwd: Fix zero-padding of input to H()
Another niceness of OpenSSL is that if the high-order bit of a 521-bit
big num is not set then BN_bn2bin() will just return 65 bytes instead of
66 bytes with the 1st (big endian, after all) being all zero. When this
happens the wrong number of octets are mixed into function H(). So
there's a whole bunch of "offset" computations and BN_bn2bin() dumps the
big number into a buffer + offset. That should be obvious in the patch
too.
2011-11-19 16:47:25 +02:00
Dan Harkins
18f5f3de03 EAP-pwd: Fix KDF for group 21
The previous EAP-pwd KDF implemented has an issue with group 21, that is
an elliptic curve group based on a 521 bit prime. 521 is not an even
multiple of 8, and therein lies the problem.

OpenSSL's BN library interprets a string of bits as in big-endian format
so all the calls of BN_bin2bn() will take the binary blob of bits and
turn it into a big number in big-endian format. In the EAP-pwd KDF, I am
stretching the key to "primebitlen". When that is not an even multiple
of 8 I have to mask off the excess. But I was masking off the excess
bits in the 1st octet (big endian after all) but that isn't right. The
KDF produces a string of endian-less bits. The 521st bit is the first
bit in the last octet, not the 7th bit in the first octet. So that has
been fixed and you can see in the attached diff what I'm doing.
2011-11-19 16:43:49 +02:00
Johannes Berg
397188521d nl80211: Support in-kernel station poll
If the kernel supports this, don't use manual null
data frame transmissions. This is one thing to get
rid of cooked monitor interfaces.

Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-19 14:23:46 +02:00
Johannes Berg
d12dab4c6f nl80211: Use non-receiving socket for EAPOL TX
The non-monitor TX currently uses a normal L2 abstraction
socket, but that will also receive frames we don't want,
so use a plain socket that isn't bound for RX. This might
be possible using the L2 abstraction, but we need a plain
socket later for getting TX status events here.

Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-19 14:00:53 +02:00
Johannes Berg
61cbe2ffd8 nl80211: Use device AP SME capability
This changes the auto-detection of whether or not the device contains
the AP SME away from monitor interface addition failing to the explicit
attribute in nl80211. Keep the old auto-detection for a little while so
that ath6kl isn't broken right away.

Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-19 13:42:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7a5257bbc9 nl80211: Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-19 13:40:07 +02:00
Johannes Berg
dd840f793c AP: Add explicit EAPOL TX status event
The new event can be used when EAPOL TX status can't be reported as a
complete 802.11 frame but is instead reported as just the EAPOL data as
originally passed to hapd_send_eapol().

Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-19 13:00:30 +02:00
Maciej Szmigiero
6589774746 OpenSSL: Read certificate chain from server_cert file
Currently OpenSSL implementation of TLS in hostapd loads only top
certificate in server certificate file. Change this to try to the
whole chain first and only if that fails, revert to old behavior.

Signed-off-by: Maciej Szmigiero <mhej@o2.pl>
2011-11-19 12:06:59 +02:00
Jithu Jance
57ebba598d nl80211: Implement shared_freq
This patch implements shared_freq handler for driver_nl80211.c. If a
"p2p_group_add" happens after legacy STA association, then this patch
will help to start the GO on the same frequency. This is useful when
supplicant is started on multiple interface running over a singly "PHY"
and the station interface is not used for the P2P device operations.

For example, wpa_supplicant -iwlan0 ..  -N -iwlan1 ... and wlan0 is used
for station connection and wlan1 as the P2P device interface.

Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2011-11-19 11:23:49 +02:00
Ben Greear
3b7ea88047 nl80211: Make MLME failure messages unique
Without this, it is impossible to tell exactly which
MLME code returned the error.

Also, convert to wpa_dbg so that we get device names
in the messages.

Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-11-18 23:41:52 +02:00
Johannes Berg
eb916eb899 P2P: Clear WPS method when GO negotiation fails
When GO negotation fails the WPS method is currently not cleared, which
can result in GO negotiation being resumed when a GO negotiation request
frame is received from the peer. That is unexpected as locally we
already gave up.

This manifests itself in getting

1319574733.955685: wlan0: P2P-GO-NEG-FAILURE status=-1
1319574733.955723: P2P: Removing pending group interface p2p-wlan0-0
...
1319574736.648378: wlan0: P2P: Starting GO Negotiation with previously
authorized peer
...
1319574736.650115: wlan0: P2P: Sending GO Negotiation Response
...
1319574736.988038: wlan0: P2P-GO-NEG-SUCCESS
1319574736.988233: P2P: No pending group interface
1319574736.988268: P2P: Create a new interface p2p-wlan0-1 for the group

Clear the WPS method to avoid this situation. I wasn't
able to test this though, but given the log I can only
assume this is how the situation happened.

Reported-by: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-18 23:34:53 +02:00
Dan Williams
98ac6763ff nl80211: Fix UNSPEC signal quality reporting
r->level got assigned so it's clearly not INVALID; instead
r->qual should be invalid.

Signed-hostap: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
2011-11-18 23:23:45 +02:00
Jithu Jance
5cfda25e44 P2P: Indicate GO Negotiation failure on peer expiration
If P2P device expires while a GO Negotiation is in progress, currently
p2p->go_neg_peer is cleared without indicating GO Nego failure. This
will result in pending group interfaces to be left over. This patch will
indicate GO Negotiation failure and will remove any pending group
interfaces.

This patch addresses a corner case in GO-Negotiation case. Consider the
scenario where two devices A and B are in discovery stage and Device B
vanishes [moves out of range] when a connect is issued on the Device A.
Then Device A keeps on retrying the GO Negotiation Request till the
retry limit is reached. On reaching retry limit, the pending group
interface is removed. But suppose if the peer entry in the device list
expires before the retry limit is reached, then pending group interface
was not removed.

Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2011-11-18 23:13:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e159cc5e9b Use NULL instead of 0 for pointers
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-18 22:07:30 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b5472a450f P2P: Fix collection of member-in-group information for peer entries
Invalid use of memcpy instead of memcmp in comparison resulted in the
GO interface address getting set incorrectly if the GO did not show up
in scan results anymore.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-18 21:58:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
19df9b0761 Mark local functions static
These functions are not used outside the file in which they are defined.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-18 21:53:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
373f6c7211 Include wpa_auth_glue.h to verify function prototypes
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-18 21:53:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
da4419c6db Include list.h after trace.h to avoid offsetof refinition
trace.h may end up including system header files that define offsetof,
so include the compatibility definition from list.h only after this.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-18 21:43:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a40e9d3e3d Remove incorrect le16 type cast
HT_INFO_OPERATION_MODE_OP_MODE_MASK is used with variables in host
byte order, so it should not be claimed as le16.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-18 21:39:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4740d5b9d9 Fix the debug message in the previous commit
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-17 23:05:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0d442affb6 Set Secure=1 for EAPOL-Key msg 3/4 in WPA conditional on 2/4
This is a workaround for Windows 7 supplicant rejecting WPA msg 3/4
in case it used Secure=1 in msg 2/4. This can happen, e.g., when
rekeying PTK after EAPOL-Key Error Request (Michael MIC failure)
from the supplicant.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-17 22:59:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e9447a94c0 Use a single define for maximum number of EAP methods
This cleans up the code a bit by not having to deal with theoretical
possibility of maximum number of EAP methods to be different between
various components in hostapd.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-17 20:06:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
68a0f6d768 WPS: Use strdup to initialize dev_password for PBC
Some static analyzers complain about memset with '0' value. This was
used correctly here, but since use of strdup is about as good an option,
use that to silence the invalid warnings.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-17 19:58:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bfbc4284a8 Avoid 0-length memmove from buffer end to keep static analyzers happier
This avoid incorrect errors from some static analyzers that do not like
memmove with pointers just after the end of a buffer even if the number
of bytes to move is zero.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-17 19:54:26 +02:00
Johannes Berg
335d42b1a6 nl80211: Get rid of family/cache objects
All we really need is the family ID, and we can
get that with genl_ctrl_resolve() and then don't
need to worry about family/cache objects.

Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-16 16:42:49 +02:00
Johannes Berg
38dcca9ab0 P2P: Deal with a peer associating while connected
If a P2P client associates with the group while it is
already associated, two member entries may be added to
the group which also confuses num_members counting.

Deal with this by removing the existing entry first
before adding a new one.

I think the way Reinette ran into this was due to our
tx_sync implementation in iwlagn, mac80211 might have
queued two association frames thinking the first one
just failed, but both only went out after the sync was
really successful (which tx_sync doesn't wait for).

Reported-by: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-11-16 16:36:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
39185dfa54 P2P: Wait until ongoing scan completes before starting P2P find
The P2P_FIND command was failing if it was issued at the moment when
a scan operation was in progress. Avoid returning failure in this
case by scheduling the P2P find to start once the ongoing scan is
completed.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-15 21:28:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
545cfc4bf3 WEXT: Use linux/wireless.h instead of wireless_copy.h
WEXT is not really changing anymore and more or less all Linux
distros come with linux/wireless.h that is recent enough to
allow the driver wrappers to be build.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-15 20:03:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
16476dd124 Fix P2P IE configuration for GO mode
Commit c2ff13c533 broke this with a
copy-paste typo that ended up adding the Probe Request P2P IE into the
Beacon frame (i.e., Beacon frame had two P2P IEs while Probe Response
had none).

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-11-14 16:10:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8f2e2e369b Make crypto_hash_init() easier for static analyzers
Avoid zero-length memset at the end of the buffer. This is not really
needed, but it makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 23:24:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
911e10eac6 Make crypto_hash_init() easier for static analyzers
Avoid zero-length memset at the end of the buffer. This is not really
needed, but it makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 23:19:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
16cc7a4304 Make radius_msg_add_attr_user_password() easier for static analyzers
Explicitly validate data_len so that static analyzers do not get
confused about the padlen validation. This is not really needed, but it
makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 23:14:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a9ea17491a Make fips186_2_prf() easier for static analyzers
Explicitly validate seed_len to skip memset call with zero length
of copied data at the end of the buffer. This is not really needed,
but it makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 22:59:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7adc3c1296 Make phase2_method initialization easier for static analyzers
data->phase2_method cannot really be NULL if
eap_fast_init_phase2_method() returns success, but this construction
seems to be too difficult for some static analyzers. While this change
is not really needed in practice, it makes it easier to go through
warnings from such analyzers.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 22:47:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4c8a333b54 Make time_adv use easier for static analyzers
hapd->time_adv cannot really be NULL if hostapd_update_time_adv()
returns success, but this construction seems to be too difficult
for some static analyzers. While this change is not really needed
in practice, it makes it easier to go through warnings from such
analyzers.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 22:45:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a5c696adb4 nl80211: Verify that global driver pointer is not NULL
driver_nl80211.c assumes that global driver pointer is set, so better
make this more consistent.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 22:39:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
99c01af9aa P2P: Verify that assoc req IEs are available for group update
Do not call p2p_group_notif_assoc() if the driver did not return
IEs from the association request.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 22:33:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a17539ebcd Remove unnecessary include file inclusion
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 22:13:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6ec64015f5 Use shared SHA-256 define for the block size
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 21:43:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7f6400ed19 Make sha256_process() easier for static analyzers
md->curlen cannot indicate full buffer size here since the buffered
data is processed whenever the full block size of data is available.
Avoid invalid warnings from static analyzers on memcpy() outside the
buffer length by verifying that curlen is smaller than block size.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 21:36:23 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94a9ebb0b2 TLS: Fix double-free on error path
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 20:57:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9d77a392c7 Use a pre-processor macro to simplify event_to_string()
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 19:06:37 +02:00
Ben Greear
6c3771d7d5 Print human readable driver event names
This makes it easier to understand the event related logs.

Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-11-13 19:01:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aea855d752 Move wpa_scan_results_free() into shared C file
Replace the inline helper function with a new C file that can be used
for common driver API related function.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 18:56:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3724ddc0c1 PEAP: Verify peap_prfplus() result
This function can fail in theory since the SHA-1 functions are
allowed to return an error. While this does not really happen in
practice (we would not get this far if SHA-1 does not work), it is
cleaner to include the error handling here to keep static analyzers
happier. [Bug 421]

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 11:29:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b6c8df695c Remove station functionality from hostap and madwifi driver wrappers
This has been obsoleted by the more generic Linux WEXT (driver_wext.c)
support. The hostap and madwifi driver wrappers can now be used only
with hostapd. The old station interface remains available in releases up
to 1.x.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 11:14:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3962b65858 Remove unmaintained driver wrappers
The driver wrappers broadcom, iphone, osx, and ralink have not been
maintained for a while and it does not look like they will be in the
future either. As such, remove them from the development branch. The
previous versions will be included in older releases up to 1.x.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 10:57:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dbdcfa3979 TLS: Add preliminary support for partial message processing
Reassemble partial TLS records to make the internal TLS client
implementation more convenient for stream sockets.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 10:47:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
613522a40a TLS: Fix block cipher padding validation
The padding validation was done on the last padding-length octets in the
buffer which misses the first padding octet (the last octet is the
padding length). Fix the starting offset for the comparison loop to get
the first octet verified. [Bug 420]

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-13 10:42:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c4a3480826 TLS: Clean up TLS record layer processing
Return number of user input bytes from tlsv1_record_receive() to
move this detail into the proper record layer processing. In addition,
ignore unknown content types at record layer and allow processing to
continue after warning level TLS alerts to provide minimal workaround
for closure alerts.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-05 13:04:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
edc95487aa Add random.c into libcrypto.a
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-05 13:02:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ae055af4f7 Move AP events for STA connected/disconnected into one function
Instead of trying to remember to add wpa_msg() calls for every possible
path where a STA becomes authorized or unauthorized, use
ap_sta_set_authorized() to send these events more consistently.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-03 22:17:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3ec1e9020f Fix some recent wpa_msg() calls in hostapd use correct context
wpa_msg() has to use hapd->msg_ctx instead of hapd as the context
pointer to work properly in wpa_supplicant AP mode.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-03 22:04:17 +02:00
Nicolas Cavallari
6caaae1e48 hostapd: Send an event when an inactive station is removed
Currently, there is no events over the control interface
when a AP disconnects a station due to inactivity.  With
this patch, an "AP-STA-DISCONNECTED" event will be sent.

Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <nicolas.cavallari@lri.fr>
2011-11-03 21:58:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
39e7d718f6 ndis: Work around lack of C99 designated initializers in MSVC
Use a driver_ndis.c specific initialization function to fill in the
wpa_driver_ops information to make it easier to modify struct
wpa_driver_ops in the future. Being able to build driver_ndis.c
with MSVC was the only reason for having to maintain the same order
of function pointers in struct wpa_driver_ops and for having to
update driver_ndis.c for all changes in that structure.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-03 18:45:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d33ce0d5b5 Include time.h to fix Windows builds
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-03 18:00:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
75b51fde2d Update version number to 2.0-devel
hostap.git is now a development branch for 2.0 with 1.x releases
having been forked to hostap-1.git.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-11-03 12:19:44 +02:00
Yoni Divinsky
9354e59480 Configure new GTK/IGTK to driver in case of TKIP countermeasures
The GTK is renewed in the hostapd after a MIC attack dissassociation
without informing the driver, causing decryption failures. This patch
sends the new GTK/IGTK to the driver after it is updated by the hostapd.

Signed-off-by: Yoni Divinsky <yoni.divinsky@ti.com>
2011-10-30 22:19:49 +02:00
Olivier Sobrie
6f75536fc9 WPS: Send the credential when learning AP params in registrar role
When the supplicant acts as a registrar to learn the access point
parameters send the credentials to the wpa_cli interface after
receiving the 7th message. This is needed for proper behavior with
wps_cred_processing set to 1 or 2.

Without this patch, after the 7th message you got the WPS-CRED-RECEIVED
notification without the credentials. This was because the cred_attr and
cred_attr_len were not filled in in the wps structure.

Signed-off-by: Olivier Sobrie <olivier@sobrie.be>
2011-10-30 22:10:40 +02:00
Pavel Roskin
9339bd5cd2 random: Improve error messages about writing to entropy file 2011-10-30 21:50:22 +02:00
Gary Morain
577db0aedd Prefer 5 GHz networks over 2.4 GHz networks
In scan.c, merge a channel's noise value into the scan results. When
comparing scan results, compute the signal-to-noise ratio and use it
when available. Prefer a 5 GHz network if its SNR is really big (> 30)
or if its SNR is relatively close to the other network's.
2011-10-30 21:08:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fbc72d32c6 Ignore Michael MIC failure reports if cipher is not TKIP
Some stations have been reported to send EAPOL-Key Error Reports
indicating Michael MIC failures even when the cipher is not TKIP
(e.g., when the network is using only CCMP). Ignore such reports
to avoid starting TKIP countermeasures unnecessarily. This can
prevent certaint types of denial of service attacks by insiders,
but mostly this is to work around invalid station implementations.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 12:53:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ec02780529 Move Michael MIC error report processing into separate function
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 12:53:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
01a1749156 Fix TKIP countermeasures stopping in deinit paths
The eloop timeout to stop TKIP countermeasures has to be canceled
on deinit path to avoid leaving bogus timeouts behind.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 12:53:20 +02:00
Dan Williams
81c57e221d Add wpa_supplicant_ctrl_req_from_string()
Converts from a string to a control request enum when input
from a control interface is received. Will be used by a
subsequent patch.

Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
2011-10-30 12:04:24 +02:00
Dan Williams
9ef1aaae24 Use an enum for EAP SM requests
Control requests will be extended for non-EAP uses later, so it makes
sense to have them be generic. Furthermore, having them defined as an
enum is easier for processing internally, and more generic for control
interfaces that may not use field names. The public ctrl_req_type /
field_name conversion function will be used later by the D-Bus control
interface too.

Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
2011-10-30 12:04:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
af72d17e72 EAP-TTLS peer: Fix user input during implicit identity request
Special processing is needed to handle EAP user request for
identity or password at the beginning of Phase 2 when the implicit
identity request is used. data->pending_phase2_req needs to be set
to an empty buffer in that case to avoid re-processing the previous
part of TLS negotiation when the user enters the needed information.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-30 12:02:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b3af99d202 nl80211: Disable IEEE 802.11b rates only for P2P iftypes
Instead of hardcoding IEEE 802.11b rates to be disabled whenever
P2P support is built in and supported by the driver, do this only
when an interface is set to P2P mode (both when adding a new
interface and when changing the interface mode). This re-enables
use of IEEE 802.11b APs with CONFIG_P2P=y builds.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-29 22:46:58 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
97bcd562eb Remove disable_11b_rates() driver_ops
This function was used unconditionally if wpa_supplicant build
includes CONFIG_P2P=y. Adding a separate driver_ops for such use
is not really useful since the driver wrappers can do the same
internally. Remove this driver_ops and move matching functionality
into driver_nl80211.c which was the only driver wrapper using
this driver_ops callback.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-29 22:25:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1dea5882be nl80211: Fix re-enabling of 802.11b rates
nl80211_disable_11b_rates() function was supposed to use the 'disabled'
parameter to figure out whether to disable or re-enable 802.11b rates.
In addition, the driver deinit path was now ending up re-disabling the
enabled rates at the end of the deinit operations when the interface
type was forced back to station. Both of these issues are now fixed
and the 2.4 GHz band TX rate index is cleared properly when
wpa_supplicant is stopped.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-29 22:12:26 +03:00
Eliad Peller
083590503b nl80211: disable_11b_rates on interface mode change
disable_11b_rates() is called on interface addition,
but not on interface type change, resulting in 11b rates
enabled on p2p interfaces.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-10-29 22:00:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b106173a82 Add no_cck parameter for send_action() driver_ops
This can be used to apply the no-CCK rule conditionally depending on
which frame is being sent. The no-CCK rule applies only for P2P
management frames while SA Query and FT use cases do not have similar
restrictions.

Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
2011-10-29 21:49:46 +03:00
Rajkumar Manoharan
970fa12ea2 nl80211: Add support to disable CCK rate for P2P frames
Add a new attribute to specify whether to use CCK rate or not during
scan and sending management frames. This helps to send P2P probes
at non-CCK rate. This ensures that P2P probe request/response/action
frames are always sent at non-CCK rates.

Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-10-29 21:23:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
451c367d06 Remove unused valid_bss_mask driver_ops 2011-10-29 11:34:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
735f652237 Remove unconfigurable cts_protection_type
This was included in the AP configuration parameters, but there has
been no way to set it to anything else than the default automatic
mode. Remove this parameter and just hardcode ERP determination to
follow the automatic mode.
2011-10-29 11:24:53 +03:00
Evan Broder
c48183fca2 For MS-CHAP, convert the password from UTF-8 to UCS-2
The MS-CHAPv1 and MS-CHAPv2 RFCs specify that the password is a string
of "Unicode characters", which for Windows means UCS-2; thus the
password could be any even-length string of up to 512 bytes.

Instead of making the incompatible change of requiring the incoming
password to be UCS-2 encoded, assume the password is UTF-8 encoded and
convert it before using it in NtPasswordHash and
EncryptPwBlockWithPasswordHash.

Signed-off-by: Evan Broder <ebroder@mokafive.com>
2011-10-29 00:23:54 +03:00
Johannes Berg
6604da3cf0 dl_list: Add DEFINE_DL_LIST
This allows statically defining an empty initialised list.
2011-10-28 23:03:13 +03:00
Jithu Jance
3074d8f12d P2P: Notify device expiry via P2P-DEVICE-LOST event
This patch will notify applications listening over control socket about
the device expiry [from p2p peer list].
2011-10-28 22:13:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
59d249255c nl80211: Ignore netlink interface down if interface is up
The netlink event processing is delayed since they are only returned
after control returns to eloop. This can result in netlink down events
being processed at a point when the interface has is actually still
there (the first event on new interface is down) and that can result in
odd behavior especially when the resulting interface-disabled event is
delivered to AP mode interface with wpa_supplicant.

Work around this by filtering netlink down events if the matching
interface is up at the time the netlink event is processed. This fixes
an issue brought up by commit 36d84860bb.
2011-10-28 21:08:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d28b43f66f Fix WPA authenticator configuration to not leave uninitialized fields
hostapd_wpa_auth_conf() is called on uninitialized memory and the
conditional blocks in this function may leave some fields into
uninitialized state. This can result in unexpected behavior elsewhere
since some of the variables may be used without matching #ifdef
blocks. Fix this by zeroing the memory.
2011-10-28 12:13:56 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
08f6ab76a5 TDLS: Do not clear peer data too early for teardown
TPK will be needed to be able to generate FTIE MIC for the
teardown message, so maintain peer data for a bit longer in
case the teardown FTIE request comes back from the driver.
2011-10-27 23:15:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c581201493 TDLS: Disable link on various error cases
This is needed to be able to return back to AP path on error cases.
2011-10-27 23:13:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
db9af0da70 TDLS: Disable previous link to fix renegotiation 2011-10-27 23:13:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
da30c93ab1 TDLS: Fix concurrent initialization test code
Must not use data from peer TDLS Setup Request if the concurrent
initialization from us is supposed to be the one that gets completed.
2011-10-27 23:12:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ca03378b27 TDLS: Fix teardown on renegotiation
Need to disable the link when receiving TDLS Setup Request from a
peer with which a direct link has already been set up.
2011-10-27 23:10:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5c1c940f1d TDLS: Fix long frame test for teardown 2011-10-27 23:09:23 +03:00
Jay Katabathuni
1d21e9dd5a Interworking: Fix Advertisement Protocol element length limit
The Query Response Length Limit is not allowed to be zero when
this is sent by the AP. Use 0x7F to indicate that the limit is
based on maximum number of GAS fragments.
2011-10-25 11:31:21 +03:00
Jithu Jance
c9aab27406 P2P: Append P2P Device Address to AP-STA-CONNECTED event
For P2P, the p2p_connect takes in device address argument to make a
connection. However the connected event AP-STA-CONNECTED comes with
interface address. The application listening on events would find it
difficult to map interface address to the p2p device address which is
provided for connection.

Append P2P Device Address to AP-STA-CONNECTED event for P2P Client
connection. This will help applications to easily map the P2P Interface
Address to P2P Device Address on CONNECTED event. For non-P2P case, it
will just print the usual STA MAC address alone.

Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
2011-10-25 00:13:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
acc247b260 P2P: Advertise Persistent Reconnect group capability
The persistent_reconnect configuration parameter was used to decide
whether to accept invitation to re-establish a persistent group.
However, this was not being advertised in the Group Capability bitmap.
Add the Persistent Reconnect bit based on this configuration to GO
Negotiation frames and Beacon/Probe Response frames from the GO.
2011-10-24 17:29:37 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
ccc12d7841 TDLS: Make use of wpa_tdls_add_peer to avoid code duplication
Use the wpa_tdls_add_peer function to allocate TDLS peer structures.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:20:58 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
2d565a61f2 TDLS: Support mgmt-frame Tx for ctrl-iface operations
Use capability information to decide whether to perform a given TDLS
operation internally or through mgmt-frame Tx.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:20:43 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
45b722f150 TDLS: Add peer as a STA during link setup
Before commencing setup, add a new STA entry to the driver representing
the peer. Later during setup, update the STA entry using information
received from the peer.

Extend sta_add() callback for adding/modifying a TDLS peer entry and
connect it to the TDLS state machine. Implement this callback for the
nl80211 driver and send peer information to kernel.

Mark TDLS peer entries with a new flag and translate it to a
corresponding nl80211 flag in the nl80211 driver.

In addition, correct TDLS related documentation in the wpa_driver_ops
structure.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:19:35 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
979bcccf64 TDLS: Collect peer capabilities and supp-rates during link setup
Record the capabilities and supported rates of the TDLS peer during
link setup. These are given in the IEs passed in Setup Request and
Setup Response frames.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:19:13 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
8f15f711c5 TDLS: Implement low-ack event for lost TDLS peers
Disable the direct connection when a TDLS peer stops responding
to packets, as indicated by the "LOW ACK" event coming from a driver.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:19:08 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
7a1486cd31 TDLS: Support sending TDLS discovery requests
Allow sending a TDLS discovery request as a frame through the driver.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:19:05 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
7de27409a2 TDLS: Support sending a teardown frame from usermode
When a driver does not implement the TDLS_TEARDOWN operation internally,
send an explicit TDLS link teardown frame to the driver.

Change all teardown calls to use these calling semantics.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:18:49 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
35287637cc TDLS/nl80211: Support receiving TDLS discovery response frames
Register for the TDLS discovery response public action frame in nl80211.
Print out a debug message when a Discovery Resp frame is received and
validated.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:18:35 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
4d0d6b37f9 TDLS: Process discovery requests and send discovery responses
When a discovery request is received, add the peer to the TDLS peer
cache and send a response containing minimal data. Mandatory IEs in
the discovery response frame will be filled out by the driver.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:18:27 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
c58ab8f249 TDLS: Get TDLS related capabilities from driver
Put glue code in place to propagate TDLS related driver capabilities to
the TDLS state machine.

If the driver doesn't support capabilities, assume TDLS is supported
internally.

When TDLS is explicitly not supported, disable all user facing TDLS
operations.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:15:15 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
03ea178603 nl80211: Implement TDLS callback functions and propagate capabilities
Allow passing high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames to kernel
via new nl80211 commands.

Propagate TDLS related nl80211 capability flags from kernel and add them
as driver capability flags.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:15:05 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
568526f1ea TDLS: Use a valid dialog-token in a setup request
A zero dialog-token is considered invalid by IEEE Std 802.11z-2010.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
2011-10-23 22:14:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8c66e18511 nl80211: Handle special TDLS direct link key index use
An ugly hack is currently used to indicate keys for TDLS direct link:
key_idx == -1. That needs to be converted to 0 for cfg80211 to accept
the key.
2011-10-23 22:14:05 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
33d8a77a39 Remove incorrect statement about get_hw_feature_data() driver_ops
This function is actually needed for quite a bit more than just
user space MLME implementation. The old comment here has not been
accurate for a long time, so get rid of it.
2011-10-23 20:09:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
edc3a7c414 Remove unused driver_ops client MLME functions
These driver_ops functions set_channel, set_ssid, set_bssid,
mlme_add_sta, and mlme_remove_sta were used with the user space
MLME implementation in wpa_supplicant. That was only for testing
purposes and was removed, but these driver_ops were forgotten.
Remove them now to remove confusing driver_ops definitions.
2011-10-23 20:07:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e3b473eb4e Allow driver wrappers to indicate whether HT info is known
This is needed to be able to figure out whether the driver is known
not to support HT.
2011-10-23 17:21:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3803bd331d TLS: Validate RSA ClientKeyExchange length field
Instead of using implicit length based on the received buffer, validate
RSA ClientKeyExchange based on the explicit length field.
2011-10-23 13:04:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
46eeedac61 Remove unused variables 2011-10-23 12:42:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2683690d91 Fix hostapd_wpa_auth_send_ether() return value
This was not currently used for anything, but better return the correct
value instead of hardcoded -1.
2011-10-23 12:33:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fe4c43ce95 Remove unused variable from os_gmtime() 2011-10-23 12:22:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bd2df8921b nl80211: Remove some unnecessary ifdef HOSTAPD blocks 2011-10-22 22:51:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
17fbb751e1 Remove user space client MLME
This code was used only with driver_test.c to allow MLME operations
in hostapd to be tested without having to use a real radio. There
are no plans on extending this to any other use than testing and
mac80211_hwsim has now obsoled the need for this type of testing.
As such, we can drop this code from wpa_supplicant to clean up the
implementation of unnecessary complexity.
2011-10-22 22:45:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9e0e6902a2 Share a single wpa_scan_results_free() implementation
There is not really a very good location for this anywhere, but the
function is small enough to live as an inline function for now.
2011-10-22 22:09:40 +03:00
Andrii Bordunov
d01b205378 Remove unused variable and function 2011-10-22 21:59:17 +03:00
Ben Greear
f935bd4dc5 Fix typo in comment related to EAPOL
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-10-22 21:41:09 +03:00
Ben Greear
c81eff1a61 nl80211: Use one global ioctl socket
Saves sockets when using multiple VIFS in a single
wpa_supplicant process.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-10-22 21:39:42 +03:00
Ben Greear
276e2d671c nl80211: Use a global netlink command object
Netlink sockets can be shared among all driver instances, saving
sockets and memory when using multiple interfaces in a single process.
2011-10-22 20:06:32 +03:00
Ben Greear
2a7b66f574 nl80211: Use global nl_cb template
All interfaces can share a single nl_cb template.
2011-10-22 20:06:30 +03:00
Ben Greear
dac12351d8 nl80211: Clean up error path in wpa_driver_nl80211_init
No need to duplicate the deinit code since wpa_driver_nl80211_deinit()
can be used here to clean up after a failure.
2011-10-22 18:28:06 +03:00
Johannes Berg
a92dfde818 nl80211: Abstract handle/cache (de)allocation
This is a cleanup now and makes it easier to add more sockets in the
future.
2011-10-22 16:56:43 +03:00
Johannes Berg
7635bfb071 nl80211: Fix hostapd error path
i802_init() tries to clean up everything manually, call
wpa_driver_nl80211_deinit() instead and also handle the
EAPOL socket properly.
2011-10-22 13:04:47 +03:00
Ben Greear
36d84860bb nl80211: Use global netlink rtm event object
Netlink sockets can be shared among all driver instances, saving lots
of sockets, spurious log messages, memory, and CPU usage when using
multiple interfaces in a single process.
2011-10-22 12:39:05 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4b24282a17 hostapd: Call global_init/global_deinit driver_ops
Now both wpa_supplicant and hostapd allow the driver wrappers to use the
global context similarly.
2011-10-22 12:22:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9fb0407055 nl80211: Use a wrapper for genlmsg_put
This reduces the code size by a kilobyte or so and makes it easier
to replace the netlink instances to be shared among interfaces.
2011-10-22 11:29:03 +03:00
Dmitry Shmidt
bd43938102 wext: Do not set SSID on disconnect on Android
Some drivers seem to try to associate using the random SSID, so
do not use this hack on Android.
2011-10-21 19:11:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
724950836f wext: Clean up the disconnect BSSID/SSID clearing 2011-10-21 19:09:25 +03:00
Dmitry Shmidt
8f5b9aa19a Set ANDROID_LOG_NAME depending on application
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-10-21 18:59:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bdc4c18e0a wext: Remove trailing whitespace 2011-10-21 18:58:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
122ba57936 Interworking: Filter Probe Request frames based on HESSID and ANT
Do not reply to Interworking-enabled Probe Request frames if they
request mismatching HESSID or ANT.
2011-10-21 12:43:53 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
538958ae9c Interworking: Add Interworking element to IE parser 2011-10-21 12:43:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
16991cffd6 Interworking: Include Access Network Type in set_ap() driver_ops
This may be needed for drivers that process Probe Request frames
internally.
2011-10-21 12:12:36 +03:00
Johannes Berg
e8b5e24e04 nl80211: Clean up capability querying
There's no need to store everything once and then copy it. Just fill the
capa struct directly in the function that parses the info from nl80211.
2011-10-20 21:57:32 +03:00
Johannes Berg
9b90955ec7 AP: Pass only bssid/addr/wds to EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN 2011-10-20 21:51:32 +03:00
Johannes Berg
9236ba4cb5 Move get_hdr_bssid() to make it easier to share for other uses 2011-10-20 21:50:23 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6e8183d714 nl80211: Stop more quickly on initialization errors
Stop on fatal errors like an attempt to use a non-existing interface or
not have root privileges to avoid producing confusing error messages.
2011-10-20 21:36:36 +03:00
Johannes Berg
40442f5b48 nl80211: Compat code for genl_ctrl_alloc_cache
It's really a waste of bits to duplicate the code for
genl_ctrl_alloc_cache() again and again -- just add a
wrapper like in iw.
2011-10-20 21:08:26 +03:00
Johannes Berg
bcf24348ed AP: Do station poll in driver wrapper
This offloads the station polling to driver wrappers, which may offload
it again to the driver. The hostap driver wrapper uses "real" data
frames while nl80211 uses null data frames.

Also add a specific event to indicate that a poll was successful for
future use with the nl80211 driver.
2011-10-20 21:03:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
180cdf45a4 wext: Increase scan timeout from 5 to 10 seconds
Some dualband cards can use more than five seconds to run through
a full scan, so increase the timeout to avoid hitting the missing
scan completed event workaround.
2011-10-18 23:04:36 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
54e9c5fc69 EAP: Clear ClientTimeout back to default value in INITIALIZE
This fixes an issue where WPS run leaves a small ClientTimeout
value (2) configured and the next EAPOL authentication is started
with that small value even for Identity exchange. This can cause
problems when an EAPOL packet gets dropped immediately after
association and a retry of that packet is needed (which may take
more than two seconds).
2011-10-18 18:44:35 +03:00
Dmitry Shmidt
ed3eecd786 Android: Add wpa_ctrl_cleanup()
This function can be used to clean up local UNIX domain socket files
that may be left over from clients that were previously connected to
wpa_supplicant. At least for now, this is only available for Android
builds.
2011-10-18 17:27:53 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ea08bfe384 netlink: Do not use void pointer for pointer arithmetic
This is a non-standard extension in gcc, so better not depend on it.
2011-10-18 17:00:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
39b97072b2 Add support for Time Advertisement
This adds preliminary support for IEEE 802.11v Time Advertisement
mechanism with UTC TSF offset.
2011-10-18 00:24:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
96b2cb226a Add os_gmtime() as wrapper for gmtime() 2011-10-18 00:23:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4b2a77aba2 Interworking: Add support for configuring Roaming Consortium List 2011-10-17 23:55:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c7c178e15e Interworking: Add Advertisement Protocol element
For now, assume that ANQP will always be enabled with Interworking.
This may be made separately configurable in the future.
2011-10-17 23:19:52 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3c11382b6c Remove set_intra_bss() driver_ops
This has been replaced by the isolate parameter available through
set_ap() calls.
2011-10-17 23:04:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ecff342716 atheros: Add a placeholder function for set_ap() driver_ops 2011-10-17 21:36:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8a33a63f58 Add Interworking configuration in set_ap() driver_ops
Drivers that implement SME/MLME may find it easier to use separated
information to configure Interworking related parameters.
2011-10-17 21:35:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a194b06c81 Add Ext Capab and Interworking elements to extra IEs
These need to be provided to drivers that implement SME/MLME.
2011-10-17 21:30:44 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
06c4d2472f Move Ext Capab and Interworking element construction into shared file
These needs to be available for drivers that implement SME/MLME.
2011-10-17 21:03:52 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c2ff13c533 Clean up AP mode extra IE construction
Make it easier to add more IEs into the buffers.
2011-10-17 20:55:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6c0575c322 Remove unused function argument 2011-10-17 20:10:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
31357268e5 Move AP BSS configuration parameters into set_ap()
Remove the separate driver_ops functions set_cts_protect(),
set_preamble(), set_short_slot_time(), and set_ht_params(). These
belong into same set of operations as set_ap(), so there is no need
to maintain separate functions that just make the driver wrapper
more complex.

Since these have only been used with driver_nl80211.c, the driver_ops
can be removed immediately instead of maintaining backwards
compatibility period with the old functions.
2011-10-17 19:31:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fd13a54180 Deprecate set_intra_bss() driver_ops
The AP client isolation parameter is now available through set_ap().
driver_nl80211.c was the only driver wrapper using the set_intra_bss()
call in hostap.git, but some external trees may have used this. Once
those are cleared, the set_infra_bss() driver_ops can be removed
completely. The only remaining use case for it currently is in P2P
GO mode with wpa_supplicant.
2011-10-17 18:58:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5ce0f8b31b Remove unused P2P device discovery hack from Beacon configuration
AP mode operations were used for P2P device discovery Listen state
only during early experiments. This has now been cleaned up and
ieee802_11_set_beacon() is not called for P2P device discovery.
As such, this hack to skip Beacon configuration can be removed.
2011-10-17 18:39:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
062390efd4 Start deprecating various AP mode driver_ops
The preferred way of configuring AP mode will be to use set_ap() instead
of number of separate operations hostapd has collected over the years.
2011-10-17 18:35:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9e85b1ed49 atheros: Add debug hexdumps for IE configuration 2011-10-17 17:56:59 +03:00
Mahesh Palivela
d4370eac2e Move SA Query mechanism into a file that can be shared more easily
This is the first step in allowing SA Query mechanism in hostapd to be
used with drivers that implement authentication and association MLME/SME
(i.e., do not use ieee802_11.c).
2011-10-17 17:33:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
73c41a8fab Interworking: Parse NAI Realms and match against home realm 2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b02fe7ff32 Interworking: Add commands for network selection
This adds the basic mechanism for running through network selection:
scan, ANQP fetch, network selection, and connection. Actual rules for
network selection and the creation of the network block are still
missing, but will be added in separate commits.
2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
69fbdfe48d GAS: Export gas_build_initial_resp()
This is needed for some GAS error response messages where the ANQP
Advertisement Protocol element is not used.
2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
696be77eee Define new IEEE 802.11u status codes 2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
71269b3708 WNM: Add BSS Transition Management Request for ESS Disassoc Imminent
"hostapd_cli ess_disassoc (STA addr) (URL)" can now be used to send
an ESS Dissassociation Imminent notification to the STA. This event
is shown in wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface monitors (e.g., wpa_cli):
"WNM: ESS Disassociation Imminent - session_info_url=http://example.com/session/"
2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4fe9fa0d29 nl80211: Register GAS frames for Interworking
The GAS frames are used both with P2P and Interworking, so register
them if CONFIG_INTERWORKING is used without CONFIG_P2P.
2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
46ee0427b1 IEEE 802.11u: Allow Interworking and HESSID to be configured
The new wpa_supplicant.conf file global parameters interworking and
hessid can be used to configure wpa_supplicant to include
Interworking element in Probe Request frames.
2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b83e3e93c8 IEEE 802.11u: Add configuration and advertisement for Interworking 2011-10-16 23:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
08a74e6a61 Use a common error handler in hostapd_notif_assoc() 2011-10-16 17:57:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2bb20281cb Clean up IE processing in hostapd_notif_assoc() 2011-10-16 17:49:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fa15d405c7 WPS: Fix WPS IE processing
Commit 17f6b90056 moved the concatenation
of WPS IEs, but did not include the validation that the IE buffer is not
NULL. In addition, the concatenation needs to be done based on the full
IE buffer instead of the parsed pointer that includes only a single
WPS IE.
2011-10-16 17:10:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1472d32f72 Remove unused function argument 2011-10-16 14:00:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
619e6726ba base64: Stop decoding at the first sequence of pad characters
The base64 encoded data cannot included pad characters in the middle, so
we can stop the loop at the first sequence of pad characters. If the
sequence includes more than two pad characters, the encoding is invalid
and we can indicate failure.
2011-10-16 12:36:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3b75919fa Fix double free with CONFIG_WPS_STRICT=y
Commit 17f6b90056 extended the use of
the concatenated WPS IE outside the CONFIG_WPS_STRICT block, but
forgot to remove the old wpabuf_free(wps) call.
2011-10-16 12:11:00 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
bd525934e5 nl80211: Add support for sched_scan filtering
Use the SSID filter list passed in the scheduled scan request down to
the kernel driver, so it can use the list to return only the wanted
SSIDs. Some kernel drivers can use this information to offload the
SSID filter to the hardware, helping with reducing the power
consumption.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:14 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
b59e6f267b Add filter support to scheduled scans
Pass SSIDs to be matched in scheduled scan results. Only the SSIDs
that are included in the match lists will be reported by the driver,
so the filtering can be offloaded to the hardware and the power
consumption can be reduced.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:14 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
35b741fdf7 Increase maximum number of SSIDs per scan
With scheduled scan support, we may need to pass more than 10 SSIDs in
a single scan request. Some drivers (e.g., wl12xx) support up to 16
SSIDs at once.

Change WPAS_MAX_SCAN_SSIDS from 10 to 16.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:13 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
d21c63b925 nl80211: Add scheduled scan support
This commit adds scheduled scan support in the nl80211 driver.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:13 +03:00
Luciano Coelho
cbdf3507e9 Add scheduled scan driver operations
In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan
capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need
to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used
by other drivers.

This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events.

Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
2011-10-15 18:53:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1e1a0a4dc9 edit: Fix history prev/next selection
Commit 19ec1f262e tried to fix some
cases for history prev selection, but it broke others. Fix this
properly by using a separate entry for the current edit line that
is not yet in history buffer.
2011-10-15 14:03:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
44dc872ee5 nl80211: Add debug print for channel changes 2011-10-15 13:29:56 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
dcd1eb5be5 Fix some forgotten comments in set_beacon to set_ap change 2011-10-15 13:15:24 +03:00
Jithu Jance
6758b1677a nl80211: Use shorter monitor interface name for P2P GO
Currently the P2P Interface name[p2p-%s-%d] is reset when the P2P
Interface name reaches the "IFNAMSIZ" limit. Monitor interface name is
derived from p2p interface name with the addition of few characters
[mon.p2p-%s-%d] and hence Monitor interface name hits IFNAMSIZ limit
before P2P Interface name. Rename the monitor interface name to
mon-%s-%d to reduce the length to same with p2p-%s-%d.
2011-10-15 13:07:30 +03:00
Yogesh Ashok Powar
8666585b9e Disconnect STA when it fails to get added in kernel driver/firmware
Data path for stations that get successfully associated to the
hostapd but fail to get added in the driver/firmware, will not
work. In such cases, hostapd should deauth and disconnect such
stations. In such scenario, hostapd should disconnect the STAs.

Sample output with following patch
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: authenticated
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: associated (aid 1)
wlan0: AP-STA-CONNECTED 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: Could not add STA to kernel driver
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: deauthenticated due to local deauth request

Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
Signed-off-by: Nishant Sarmukadam <nishants@marvell.com>
2011-10-15 12:41:28 +03:00
B. J
5dd80dd661 Fix NT-hash password use with integrated authentication server
The password_hash parameter was not copied in case of the integrated
authentication server (but was for RADIUS server). This broke EAP
authentication when the user entry used NT-hash.
2011-10-15 12:13:27 +03:00
Janusz Dziedzic
f1afcb391e P2P: Fix wpabuf reuse on p2p_group_notif_noa()
This currently unused function would have triggered wpabuf overflows
due to incorrect variable being reset to zero in the case the old
NoA wpabuf was large enough for the new data.
2011-10-13 01:06:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fd8e4fda50 EAPOL auth: Disconnect after IEEE 802.1X failure
The EAPOL authenticator was previously forcing disconnection in the WPS
use case. However, this can be benefitial operation with any IEEE 802.1X
authentication mechanism and need not be limited to WPS. This helps some
use cases like EAP-FAST where provisioning may require two
authentication runs if the authentication server does not allow the PAC
provisioning step to be used for normal data connection. While the
station would be free to decide to re-associate in such a case, not all
stations do and as such, it helps if the AP does that instead of leaving
the association up with EAPOL state machine in HELD state for 60
seconds.
2011-10-12 20:07:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
88dc899a1b EAP-FAST: Allow unprotected EAP-Failure in provisioning case
While EAP-FAST uses protected success notification, RFC 5422, Section
3.5 points out a possibility of EAP-Failure being sent out even after
protected success notification in case of provisioning. Change the
EAP-FAST peer implementation to accept that exception to the protected
success notification. This allows the station to re-connect more quickly
to complete EAP-FAST connection in the case the server rejects the
initial attempt by only allowing it to use to provision a new PAC.
2011-10-12 20:05:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4458d91554 P2P: Do not change SSID during GO negotiation
If GO Negotiation Request (or in theory, also GO Negotiation Response)
frame is delivered multiple time for processing, the SSID of the group
could end up getting changed. This could result in possible issues if
the peer ended up using different SSID. To avoid this, make sure the
SSID does not get changed unless the negotiation is for a new group.
2011-10-11 18:29:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3fea27274 Clear OKC-based PMKSA caching entries if PMK is changed
Whenever PMK gets changed (e.g., due to re-authentication), all PMKSA
caching entries that were created using the previous PMK needs to be
replaced. Previously, only the entry for the current AP was cleared.
Flush the other entries based on network_ctx matches to get rid of the
OKC entries. These entries can then be re-creating using OKC with the
new PMK.
2011-10-02 19:36:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15e2c77d03 Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2011-10-02 13:16:42 +03:00
Johannes Berg
1473f95e98 AP: Use QoS nullfunc for connection poll
When polling a station that has been inactive for a while, hostapd currently
always uses a null data frame. This is a bit strange with uAPSD clients
(though it seems to mostly work) since the EOSP bit can never be set in a
non-QoS frame. Make hostapd use QoS null data frames for probing when the
station is a QoS STA.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-10-01 21:04:11 +03:00
Marek Kwaczynski
ed908a55da P2P: Refresh peer entries on Probe Request RX
Do not expire P2P peer entries if Probe Request frames are received from
them.
2011-10-01 20:40:14 +03:00
Zhi Chen
56aa082a1d WPS: Send AP Settings as a wrapped Credential attribute to ctrl_iface
Wrap self-generated WPS credential for new AP settings and send that to
control interface to provide the needed information in
WPS-NEW-AP-SETTINGS for external processing.
2011-09-30 22:26:37 +03:00
Shan Palanisamy
a52eba0f44 FT: Add driver wrappers for FT with driver-based MLME/SME 2011-09-30 00:05:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0c840c33f7 Move GAS/ANQP build routines to a separate file from P2P
GAS/ANQP is a generic protocol and in no way specific to P2P, so move
routines used to build GAS/ANQP frames to a separate file that can be
shared for other uses than just P2P service discovery.
2011-09-29 22:18:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
206e1f422f P2P: Provide mechanism for figuring out p2p_scan_ie() buffer need
The new function, p2p_scan_ie_buf_len(), can be used to figure out
how large a buffer needs to be allocated for p2p_scan_ie() use. This
makes it easier to add new data into the buffer without forcing all
callers to be updated to use a larger buffer.
2011-09-29 22:18:23 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fc6997b345 P2P: Fix group formation after previous commit
p2p_in_progress() have to ignore P2P_PROVISIONING state to allow
station mode (which includes P2P client) scan to work.
2011-09-29 21:48:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
303f60d39b P2P: Do not request station mode scans during P2P operations
The P2P search mechanism depends on the same scan functionality that
is used for station mode scans. If these operations are being used
at the same time, scan result processing is not handled properly.
Avoid unexpected behavior by delaying station mode scan requests
if a P2P operation is in progress.

Among other things, this allows the station mode connection attempt
to be continued after a P2P find or group formation has been completed
if the interface is available (i.e., when the P2P group uses a
separate virtual interface).
2011-09-29 16:53:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0c96fd6d03 P2P: Do not leave P2P scan handler registered if scan fails
If the initial attempt to start a scan for p2p_find fails, an error
is reported. However, the P2P scan handler and search state was
left behind. That can result in unexpected behavior when the next
non-P2P scan results are indicated. Avoid this by clearing the
P2P search state on failure.
2011-09-29 16:52:23 +03:00
Vivek Natarajan
004ba773ce nl80211: Add driver flag for firmware-based BSS selection
This new flag can be used to change wpa_supplicant behavior in the
default ap_scan=1 mode to move BSS selection into the driver (likely
firmware). This commit is only adding the flag; separate commits
will be used to change the actual connection/roaming behavior.
2011-09-26 14:26:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
daa30c23aa Rename and fix ANQP definitions to match IEEE Std 802.11u-2011 2011-09-26 11:51:58 +03:00
Mathieu Olivari
8a8c1c0ea5 atheros: Allow flattened driver include file directories
Remove the full driver path to the driver header file to make it
easier to use common include directory for all driver headers.
2011-09-26 11:49:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fd2f2d0489 Remove EAP-TTLSv1 and TLS/IA
These protocols seem to be abandoned: latest IETF drafts have expired
years ago and it does not seem likely that EAP-TTLSv1 would be
deployed. The implementation in hostapd/wpa_supplicant was not complete
and not fully tested. In addition, the TLS/IA functionality was only
available when GnuTLS was used. Since GnuTLS removed this functionality
in 3.0.0, there is no available TLS/IA implementation in the latest
version of any supported TLS library.

Remove the EAP-TTLSv1 and TLS/IA implementation to clean up unwanted
complexity from hostapd and wpa_supplicant. In addition, this removes
any potential use of the GnuTLS extra library.
2011-09-25 21:28:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e655e1f512 GnuTLS: Fix build bit various GnuTLS versions
This fixes some build issues in GnuTLS wrapper to be compatible with
at least following GnuTLS versions: 2.2.5, 2.4.3, 2.6.6, 2.8.6,
2.10.5, 2.12.11, 3.0.3.
2011-09-25 19:32:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5c47af9a7a TLS: Add support for TLS v1.1 (RFC 4346) with internal TLS
This is disabled by defautl and can be enabled with CONFIG_TLSV11=y
build configuration parameter.
2011-09-25 17:24:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3bff59f857 TLS: Do not enforce in-place processing in tlsv1_record_send()
In preparation for record layer format changes, modify
tlsv1_record_send() to use separate buffers for payload
and the output message.
2011-09-25 17:11:52 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
85b7187ffc TLS: Add protection against record layer CBC attacks
Instead of using separate bad_record_mac and decryption_failed alerts,
use only bad_record_mac alert regardless of how the CBC decryption
failed. This provides less information to attackers that could modify
packets. In addition, instead of returning immediately on error, run
through the MAC check to make timing attacks more difficult.
2011-09-25 16:57:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
26296a8a7c TLS: Avoid unnecessary copying of encrypted data at record layer
When the received data will be decrypted, there is no need to first
copy it and then handle decryption in-place when decryption step can
take care of both operations.
2011-09-25 16:52:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
61f1ed911d TLS: Fix record layer protocol version validation
TLS v1.0 and v1.1 RFCs were not exactly clear on the use of the
protocol version in record later. As such, accept any {03,xx} value
to remain compatible with existing implementations and new protocol
versions.
2011-09-25 16:48:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
54b8f99454 P2P: Fix a race condition in some P2P command sequencies
The p2p->drv_in_listen variable is used to track Listen state operations
in the driver. This is cleared when the driver reports that the Listen
state has ended (p2p_listen_end() gets called). However, it is possible
that the driver does not indicate that if the Listen state is canceled.
This can apparently happen in some cases where p2p_connect command is
issues while the Listen state is in progress.

Work around this issue by clearing p2p->drv_in_listen when Listen state
is stopped as part of p2p_stop operation. This allows the P2P module to
process CONNECT_LISTEN timeout in p2p_timeout_connect_listen() to move
to CONNECT state, e.g., when starting GO Negotiation after Device
Discoverability mechanism.
2011-09-22 22:49:21 +03:00
Subrat Dash
6a5200e699 atheros: Fix WEXT SIOCGIWESSID use with WE-21 and newer
The "too long" buffer (32+1 octets) prevented AP from starting up with
32 octet SSID with WE-21 and newer. Fix this by reducing the
SIOCGIWESSID buffer length.
2011-09-22 15:42:03 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
ffbf1eaa26 Fix typos found by codespell
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-09-22 00:43:59 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
a776b19cda wext: Remove write-only variable ap_num
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-09-22 00:41:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c36d52427a nl80211: Support PMKSA candidate events
This adds support for RSN pre-authentication with nl80211 interface and
drivers that handle roaming internally (i.e., wpa_supplicant is not
responsible for requesting scan results that provide the needed
information without these events).
2011-09-21 16:14:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c8c71b395c Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2011-09-21 16:14:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
20f5a4c24c nl80211: Work around EALREADY from connect command
cfg80211 does not currently allow NL80211_CMD_CONNECT when there
is already an association. This can result in wpa_supplicant being
unable to request a connection if the interface is already in
connected state. Work around this by requesting disconnection if
the connect command fails with EALREADY error. This allows
wpa_supplicant to recover from the unexpected state and complete
the connect request on next attempt.
2011-09-18 21:26:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1b414f59fc eapol_test: Add option for writing server certificate chain to a file
eapol_test command line argument -o<file> can now be used to request
the received server certificate chain to be written to the specified
file. The certificates will be written in PEM format. [Bug 391]
2011-09-17 22:42:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8a55f56453 RSN: Add a debug message when considing addition of OKC entry 2011-09-16 18:45:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a8b8379adf Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2011-09-16 17:13:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
633d4469e8 Fix AP build without CONFIG_WPS=y
Make the WPS processing of (Re)Association Request frame IEs conditional
on WPS support. This fixes a build issue with wps_is_20() not being
defined and makes the non-WPS build a bit smaller.
2011-09-12 22:23:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
531e420dd7 Remove time.h include from utils/includes.h
os_*() wrappers should be used instead of functions from time.h.
Removing the header from includes.h enforces this. os_unix.c can
include this its uses are valid wrapper calls. wps_upnp.c uses
gmtime() for which there is no os_*() wrapper available yet, so
allow it to use time.h, too. Similarly, allow dump_state.c to
use time.h for ctime().
2011-09-12 22:19:26 +03:00
Per Ekman
3d9e2e6615 Remove references to time_t/time()
Use os_time() in AP mode instead of direct time() calls.
2011-09-12 22:14:30 +03:00
Johannes Berg
531f0331a1 nl80211: Cancel not yet started r-o-c
Currently, the following can happen:

1) P2P state machine requests R-O-C
2) user changes their mind and aborts
3) P2P state machine aborts R-O-C
4) driver_nl80211 rejects abort since there
   was no notification about the start yet
5) R-O-C period start notification from kernel
6) P2P state machine requests new R-O-C
7) this overlaps with old R-O-C -- iwlwifi driver
   can't handle that and returns -EBUSY
8) state machine stops dead in its tracks

The reason is that the abort isn't going through properly. Instead of
tracking whether a R-O-C is active in driver_nl80211, track whether one
was requested to avoid this scenario.

Reported-by: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-09-10 22:57:41 +03:00
Rajkumar Manoharan
47185fc788 P2P: Remove CCK supported rates when running P2P scan
This allows drivers to disable CCK rates from Probe Request frames.
For nl80211, this is currently applying only to the supported rates
element(s), but this mechanism could be extended to address TX rate
control masking, too, to lessen need for global rate disabling.

Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com>
2011-09-10 22:40:30 +03:00
Johannes Berg
7626850dd6 nl80211: Automatically use concurrent P2P if possible
Since the kernel can now advertise P2P concurrent support by advertising
interface combinations, we can take advantage of that and automatically
use P2P_CONCURRENT / P2P_MGMT_AND_NON_P2P for drivers that advertise
support.

Keep driver_param=use_p2p_group_interface=1 for anyone not advertising
interface combinations in their drivers yet.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-09-10 21:52:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
25e5d5bc08 P2P: Allow advertisement config methods to be limited
The default config methods was hardcoded to claim support for
PushButton, Display, and Keypad. While these are supported by
most P2P devices, there may be some cases where it is convenient
to be able to disable a specific config method. Use config_methods
configuration parameter to set the default values for Config Methods
in the P2P Device Info attribute.
2011-09-08 16:48:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
07fecd3915 P2P: Remove Label config method
The P2P specification (3.1.4.3) disallows use of the Label configuration
method between two P2P devices. This was previously enforced at upper
level, but the obsolete code can be removed from wpa_supplicant. This
adds a bit more strict enforcement of the policy, but should not result
in practical differences since no known P2P implementation uses Label
config method.
2011-09-08 16:40:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d8a790b922 Flush PMKSA cache entries and invalidate EAP state on network changes
If a network configuration block is removed or modified, flush
all PMKSA cache entries that were created using that network
configuration. Similarly, invalidate EAP state (fast re-auth).

The special case for OKC on wpa_supplicant reconfiguration
(network_ctx pointer change) is now addressed as part of the
PMKSA cache flushing, so it does not need a separate mechanism
for clearing the network_ctx values in the PMKSA cache.
2011-09-07 17:46:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
734baae0af Clear driver PMKSA cache entry on PMKSA cache expiration
If the driver maintains its own copy of the PMKSA cache, we need to
clear an entry from the driver whenever wpa_supplicant is dropping
an old PMKSA cache entry.
2011-09-07 16:31:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cc28ad8cdf Fix Deauth/Disassoc callback handling with test frames
The Deauth/Disassoc TX status callbacks were ending up kicking the
station entry from kernel driver when test functionality was used to
inject Deauth/Disassoc frames from the AP with the purpose of leaving
the local association in place. Fix this by using STA flags to figure
out whether there was a pending callback for the frame that we need
to act on.

In addition, add forgotten functionality for the Disassoc TX status
callback to match the behavior with Deauth.
2011-09-06 21:03:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
64fa840a97 nl80211: Fix WPA_VERSIONS attribute for Connect command
The previous code was trying to figure out which WPA version is
used based on the extra IEs requested for Association Request. That
did not work properly in cases where non-WPA networks are used with
some extra IEs. Fix this by using more robust mechanism for passing
the WPA versions from core wpa_supplicant to the driver_ops
associate().
2011-09-02 20:40:23 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
83180479f0 Android: Modify wireless_copy.h to fix Android build 2011-09-02 16:50:43 +03:00
Bharat Chakravarty
a9355fac5f WPS: Set Probe Request config methods based on configuration
Instead of hardcoding the Config Methods attribute value in Probe
Request frames, set this based on the configured parameter
config_methods to allow correct set of methods to be advertised.
2011-09-01 15:24:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ae9c400358 WPS ER: Fix UPnP XML Device Description parser to find correct device
The device description file may include multiple devices. Improve the
simplistic parser by first trying to find the WFADevice:1 device before
fetching the device parameters. While this is still far from complete
XML parsing, this should address the most common root device
specifications.
2011-08-31 13:56:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
86957e6298 nl80211: Support AP mode probe/action frame TX/RX without monitor iface
This allows non-mac80211 drivers to report received Probe Request
frames to user space and Probe Response and Action frames to be sent
from user space when using AP/P2P GO mode.
2011-08-29 14:26:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4dc03726de Delay STA entry removal until Deauth/Disassoc TX status in AP mode
This allows the driver to use PS buffering of Deauthentication and
Disassociation frames when the STA is in power save sleep. The STA
entry (and PTK) will be removed from the kernel only after the
Deauth/Disassoc has been transmitted (e.g., when the STA wakes up).
A hardcoded two second timeout is used to limit the length of this
window should the driver fail to deliver the frame (e.g., the STA
is out of range and does not wake up). The kernel STA entry is
marked unauthorized during the wait to avoid accepting Data
frames from the STA that we have decided to disconnect.

This behavior is available only with drivers that provide TX status
events for Deauth/Disassoc frames (nl80211 at this point). Other
drivers continue to use the previous behavior where the STA entry
is removed immediately.
2011-08-28 23:07:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
49a191a142 EAP: Add "expanded" EAP type to get_name functions 2011-08-28 19:23:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
17f6b90056 WPS: Wait for EAPOL-Start unless WPS 2.0 station as workaround
Extend the code that waits for the station to send EAPOL-Start before
initiating EAPOL authenticator operations to cover the case where the
station includes WPS IE in (Re)Association Request frame if that IE
does not include support for WPS 2.0. While this should not really
be needed, this may help with some deployed WPS 1.0 stations that do
not support EAPOL operations correctly and may get confused of the
EAP-Request/Identity packets that would show up twice if EAPOL-Start
is transmitted.
2011-08-28 19:16:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fb91db5639 Provide extra IEs for AP mode management frames with set_ap
Drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association
Response frames can use this information to and WPS and P2P IE
when needed.
2011-08-26 21:14:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
97a7a0b504 Add support for setting SSID hiding mode through set_ap() 2011-08-26 21:12:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b11d1d6439 Add crypto parameters to set_ap() command separately
This helps drivers that build the Beacon and Probe Response frames
internally.
2011-08-26 21:11:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d8cc23a438 Sync with include/linux/nl80211.h in wireless-testing.git 2011-08-26 21:09:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9ca47fff8c WPS: Drop responses from ER to a STA that is not in WPS protocol
If an ER tries to send a message to a STA that is not in the middle
of WPS protocol, do not try to deliver that. This can help with issues
where an ER takes long time to reply to M1 and another Registrar has
already completed negotiation.
2011-08-12 11:58:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
de6e463f57 Make sure that EAP callbacks are not done if state machine has been removed
It is possible to get a response for a pending EAP callback after the
EAP state machine has already completed its work or has timed out. For
those cases, make sure that the callback function is not delivered since
it could result in NULL pointer dereferences.
2011-08-12 11:56:44 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
167dc97501 WPS: Fix M2/M2D Config Methods to include PushButton even if PBC not in use
The Config Methods attribute in M2 and M2D messages is supposed to
indicate which configuration methods are supported by the Registrar. As
such, it should not depend on whether PBC mode is currently active or
not. That will only affect the Selected Registrar Config Methods and
Device Password ID attributes.
2011-08-11 17:03:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
59639fa112 WPS: Fix default virt/phy pushbutton config method setting
Instead of always adding PHY PushButton config method, only add this
if neither virtual nor physical push button is advertised.
2011-08-11 16:51:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ccb941e6da Add SSID as a separate item in AP mode Beacon setup
This makes it easier for drivers that need the SSID to get it from the
Beacon setup operation without having to parse the Beacon IEs.
2011-08-10 13:29:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
19c3b56685 Replace set_beacon() driver op with set_ap()
This change is a first step in better supporting different driver
architectures for AP mode operations with nl80211. This commit in
itself does not add new functionality, but it makes it easier to add
new AP mode parameters to address needs of drivers that have more of
the MLME/SME in firmware or kernel.
2011-08-10 13:22:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5fb1a23252 nl80211: Fix hostapd build 2011-08-09 23:32:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bdffdc5ddb AP: Reorder WPA/Beacon initialization
Split WPA initialization into two parts so that the Beacon frames can be
configured fully before the initial keys (GTK/IGTK) are configured. This
makes it easier for drivers that depend on the AP security mode being
fully set before the keys are configured.
2011-08-09 14:56:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bc45d4279f WPS: Do not update Beacon IEs before initial IE set
This avoids a request to the driver to first start beaconing before
the WPA/RSN IE has been generated and then immediately changing the
beacon IEs once the WPA/RSN IE is ready.
2011-08-09 14:40:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f10bfc9adb nl80211: Add l2_packet for AP mode EAPOL TX without monitor iface
This can be used with drivers that do not support monitor interface
when transmitting EAPOL frames in AP mode.
2011-08-09 14:04:53 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9db931ed6d nl80211: Do not include NL80211_ATTR_DURATION in TX frame if zero
When offloading of the offchannel TX wait is not used, it is better to
not include NL80211_ATTR_DURATION to avoid confusing nl80211/cfg80211.
2011-08-09 14:01:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a381f2a286 nl80211: Fix connect command to not claim WPA if WPS is used
Such using params->wpa_ie to figure out whether the connection is for
WPA/WPA2 is not correct since that buffer is used also to add WPS IE. In
case of WPS, do not add NL80211_ATTR_WPA_VERSIONS to avoid confusing
drivers.
2011-08-09 13:59:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a05225c819 nl80211: Add more debug information on frame TX command failures 2011-08-09 13:59:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2e92310217 random: Check fwrite return value to avoid warnings
Some compilers complain about fwrite calls if the return value is
not checked, so check the value even if it does not really make
much of a difference in this particular case.
2011-08-06 21:16:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6921f1f386 TLS: Reorder certificates if needed when reading them
The internal TLS implementation assumes that the certificate chain
is ordered by issuer certificate following the certificate that it
signed. Add the certificates to the chain in suitable order when
loading multiple certificates.
2011-08-04 22:39:03 +03:00
Anish Nataraj
628d54639a Dispatch more WPS events through hostapd ctrl_iface 2011-08-04 16:56:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
70dbe3b6d7 P2P: Fix 802.11b-only rate validation for Probe Request frames
Commit e1d526293b added code for verifying
whether the receive Probe Request frame was indicating support for only
802.11b rates, but it missed the for loop for the extended supported
rates element. Add that to fix the validation code for cases where
non-802.11b rates are in the extended supported rates element.
2011-08-02 11:18:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
93ac240496 Clarify hostapd error message on unsupported hw_mode value 2011-07-31 00:51:34 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
e783c9b0e5 madwifi: Implement set_freq for hostapd, adjust hostapd.conf
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-07-29 20:51:55 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
374038fbde hostap: Remove unused variable in handle_frame()
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-07-29 20:51:55 +03:00
Pavel Roskin
f11634bf5d hostap: Add channel selection support in hostapd
Signed-off-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org>
2011-07-29 20:51:50 +03:00
Dmitry Shmidt
a79d5479df Increase maximum number of SSIDs per scan with ProbeReq to 10 2011-07-19 08:55:46 +03:00
Eliad Peller
2f4f73b154 nl80211: Change vif type to P2P_CLI upon P2P authentication
Currently, wpa_driver_nl80211_authenticate() changes the interface type
to station. However, in case of P2P, we need to change the interface
type to P2P_CLI.

Add p2p field to the authentication params, and consider it for choosing
the correct interface type.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-07-17 20:25:58 +03:00
Eliad Peller
b1f625e0d8 nl80211: Consider P2P when changing vif type
Commit 9f51b11395 added support for P2P
interfaces when adding a new interface. However, it didn't handle the
case in which the same interface is being used and its type is being
changed. Add support for this case.

Consequently, when doing "ap_scan_as_station" we now need to save the
actual AP interface type (AP/P2P GO) in order to restore it properly.
For that, change ap_scan_as_station type from int to nl80211_iftype, and
set it to NL80211_IFTYPE_UNSPECIFED when not used.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-07-17 20:22:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ff6a158b40 nl80211: Do not re-set iftype when initializing added interface
There is no need to force the interface into station mode when
wpa_supplicant adds a new interface (e.g., P2P group) with the correct
iftype.
2011-07-17 20:03:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a1922f934d nl80211: Add more debug info for iftype changes 2011-07-17 19:47:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7d9c369827 nl80211: Ignore ifdown event if mode change triggered it
When driver_nl80211.c has to set the netdev down to change iftype, an
RTM_NEWLINK event is generated. Do not generate
EVENT_INTERFACE_DISABLED event based on that.
2011-07-17 13:56:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6554237f38 FT: Share IE parser implementation for Authenticator and Supplicant
These are almost identical, so there is no point in using separate
implementations.
2011-07-16 11:13:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3c828ebfd FT: Fix FT IE parser to not count TIE as protected IE 2011-07-16 11:05:28 +03:00
Hong Wu
c284b46141 FT: Fix the calculation of MIC Control field in FTIE
Reassociation Request/Response frame validation need to count all IEs in
the RIC. In addition, TIE is not protected, so it should not be included
in the count.

Signed-off-by: Hong Wu <hong.wu@dspg.com>
2011-07-16 10:57:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e1d526293b P2P: Do not reply to Probe Request frame indicating only 802.11b rates
Per P2P specification 2.4.1, P2P Device shall shall not respond to
Probe Request frames that indicate support for only 802.11b rates.
2011-07-15 21:49:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
97c5b3c45b P2P: Check Device ID match in Probe Request frames in Listen state
Do not reply to Probe Request frames that include a Device ID that
does not match with our own P2P Device Address.
2011-07-15 20:48:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
04a85e4401 P2P: Filter Probe Request frames based on DA and BSSID in Listen state
Only accept Probe Request frames that have a Wildcard BSSID and a
destination address that matches with our P2P Device Address or is the
broadcast address per P2P specification 3.1.2.1.1.
2011-07-15 20:28:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15f0961447 Check random_get_bytes() result before writing entropy file 2011-07-15 17:17:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
40eebf2353 MD5: Fix clearing of temporary stack memory to use correct length
sizeof of the structure instead of the pointer was supposed to be used
here. Fix this to clear the full structure at the end of MD5Final().
2011-07-15 13:42:06 +03:00
Johannes Berg
f67eeb5c32 nl80211: fix interface address assignment
When a new interface is created and already has a separate MAC address
assigned by the kernel, then we need to use that address, not just when
we've created a locally administered address.

This fixes use_p2p_group_interface=1 for iwlagn as it already makes
mac80211 assign an address for a second interface since the hardware has
two addresses assigned.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-07-15 12:05:19 +03:00
Johannes Berg
b14a210ce2 nl80211: Support GTK rekey offload
Add support to wpa_supplicant for device-based GTK rekeying. In order to
support that, pass the KEK, KCK, and replay counter to the driver, and
handle rekey events that update the latter.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-07-12 21:22:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7aec3776b9 Sync with linux/nl80211.h from wireless-testing.git 2011-07-12 20:53:32 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
95ab606345 nl80211: Send STA flags to kernel on station addition
Send STA flags to kernel when adding a new station. This ensures
stations are added with up to date flags by kernel drivers.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
2011-07-12 20:28:31 +03:00
Arik Nemtsov
d83ab1fe37 hostapd: Set STA flags when adding a new station
When adding a new station, set the STA flags as part of the sta_add()
command. This ensures the flags are up to date when the station is added
by lower level drivers.

Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
2011-07-12 20:26:52 +03:00
Hong Wu
715ed737dc FT: Disable PMKSA cache for FT-IEEE8021X
wpa_supplicant uses XXKEY instead of PMK to derive PMK-R0 and PMK-R1 for
FT-IEEE8021X key mgmt.

Signed-off-by: Hong Wu <hong.wu@dspg.com>
2011-07-05 20:49:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cb465555d4 Allow PMKSA caching to be disabled on Authenticator
A new hostapd configuration parameter, disable_pmksa_caching=1, can now
be used to disable PMKSA caching on the Authenticator. This forces the
stations to complete EAP authentication on every association when WPA2
is being used.
2011-07-05 17:13:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4f525d8e5b Move peer certificate wpa_msg() calls to notify.c
This type of wpa_supplicant specific message construction does not need
to be at the EAP implementation, so better move it up to notify.c.
2011-07-05 12:40:37 +03:00
Michael Chang
ade74830b4 Add dbus signal for information about server certification
In general, this patch attemps to extend commit
00468b4650 with dbus support.

This can be used by dbus client to implement subject match text
entry with preset value probed from server. This preset value, if
user accepts it, is remembered and passed to subject_match config
for any future authentication.

Signed-off-by: Michael Chang <mchang@novell.com>
2011-07-05 12:22:32 +03:00
Yogesh Ashok Powar
a3e685a04b hostapd: Clear keys configured when hostapd reloads configuration
Data path is broken when hostapd reloads its configuration
disabling the security which was previously enabled (WEP/WPA),
using kill -1, as old keys were not cleared.

The patch clears the keys configured when hostapd reloads
its configuration.

Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
2011-07-05 11:39:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
235279e777 TLS: Add support for tls_disable_time_checks=1 in client mode
This phase1 parameter for TLS-based EAP methods was already supported
with GnuTLS and this commit extends that support for OpenSSL and the
internal TLS implementation.
2011-07-05 11:29:42 +03:00
Angie Chinchilla
f5fc603251 P2P: Only call dev_lost() for devices that have been dev_found()
Fix a bug with the current dev_found()/dev_lost() usage. Previously
in p2p_device_free() dev_lost() was invoked for devices that had
not been dev_found(). This caused dbus related msgs to stderr like:
"Attempted to unregister path (path[0] = fi path[1] = w1) which isn't
registered"

Signed-off-by: Angie Chinchilla <angie.v.chinchilla@intel.com>
2011-07-04 20:30:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5f310a9e24 nl80211: Process association/disassociation events in AP mode
This allows non-mac80211 drivers that implement AP mode SME/MLME
in firmware or driver to notify hostapd/wpa_supplicant of AP mode
association events.
2011-07-01 18:44:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
866af8b6bd nl80211: Allow AP mode to be started without monitor interface
This is in preparation for supporting AP mode with SME/MLME in the
driver/firmware.
2011-06-28 21:59:44 +03:00
Baruch Siach
567afddb69 atheros: Fix glibc 'invalid pointer' error when WPA_TRACE is enabled
Signed-off-by: Baruch Siach <baruch@tkos.co.il>
2011-06-25 15:41:46 +03:00
Jayant Sane
2463ba70e2 P2P: Update listen and operating channel from P2P D-Bus
Some P2PDevice properties were not updated in p2p->cfg structure:
reg_class, channel, op_reg_class, and op_channel. Hence, update p2p->cfg
parameters through p2p core calls in wpas_p2p_update_config().

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel.Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
2011-06-25 12:08:43 +03:00
Jayant Sane
6402fc438b P2P: Show P2P peer signal level in D-Bus P2P device properties
Move level parameter from p2p_device to p2p_device_info in order to
expose this information and modify D-Bus P2P handler to return this new
parameter through the P2P device properties.

Signed-off-by: Fabien Marotte <fabienx.marotte@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
2011-06-23 21:29:10 +03:00
Helmut Schaa
d4744189b7 hostapd: Don't mask out non-symmetric STA HT caps
Previously hostapd just masked the STAs HT caps with its own. However,
some HT caps are not symmetric and as such need to be handled
different.

hostapd shouldn't overwrite the STAs SMPS mode as otherwise the driver
cannot know it has to use RTS/CTS to wake the receiver from dynamic
SMPS for MCS rates > 7.

hostapd shouldn't mask the RX and TX STBC caps with it's own. They are
already handled in a special case below.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-06-23 20:18:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
56234ee168 Add a copyright and license statement for a radiotap header file
This file is a part of the radiotap parser that Andy Green agreed to
relicense under the BSD license (per email, 11 Aug 2007 07:42:05
+0100). The copyright/license statement was updated in radiotap.c,
but this radiotap_iter.h file was forgotten at that point.
2011-06-23 16:39:26 +03:00
Zhu Yi
c3b0a1c8ad bsd: Fix set_key() sequence number endian issue
In set_key handler, the seq[8] is in little endian order defined by
WPA. BSD kernel uses a u_int64_t value ik_keyrsc to represent it
internally. The kernel expects the native endian order for the value.
Thus, we need to detect the endian order and swap bytes when
necessary.
2011-06-23 15:47:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7cc7307d90 Fix hostapd build without NEED_AP_MLME=y 2011-06-22 21:45:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9e2704c3a2 Add EVENT_RX_ACTION handler for hostapd
This fixes an issue with SA Query Response frames not being processed
anymore after wpa_supplicant started registering a handler for those.
This handler registration is in generic driver_nl80211.c code, so
hostapd uses it, too.
2011-06-21 20:55:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
55e632df72 Remove a compiler warning on uninitialized variable
This is not really ever used, but better keep the compiler output
cleaner.
2011-06-21 20:54:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a6efc65ddb nl80211: Add support for driver-based PMKSA cache
Implement PMKSA cache operations add, remove, and flush using nl80211
commands NL80211_CMD_{SET,DEL,FLUSH}_PMKSA to support PMKSA caching
with drivers that select the AP and generate the RSN IE internally.
2011-06-20 10:17:33 +03:00
Jayant Sane
349b213cc8 P2P: Add callback for provision discovery failure
When provision discovery fails, this new callback will be called
so P2P users can react to the failure.

Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-06-12 14:26:22 -07:00
Jayant Sane
6b56cc2d97 P2P: Retry provision discovery requests in IDLE state
Since the peer may not be in Listen state when the provision discovery
request is sent, try to send the request again number of times when in
IDLE state. This was already done when p2p_find is in progress, but this
commit adds retries to the case where no other P2P operations are in
progress.

Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-06-12 14:20:39 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6b98a33c86 Fix a compiler warning on WPS-AP-without-UPnP builds 2011-05-31 20:11:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
38e24575c1 random: Add support for maintaining internal entropy store over restarts
This can be used to avoid rejection of first two 4-way handshakes every
time hostapd (or wpa_supplicant in AP/IBSS mode) is restarted. A new
command line parameter, -e, can now be used to specify an entropy file
that will be used to maintain the needed state.
2011-05-31 20:07:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f07ead6af9 nl80211: Re-order functions to group AP/hostapd specific code
Get rid of separate ifdef/endif blocks for AP specific and hostapd
specific code, i.e., only have one main block of code for each case.
2011-05-27 19:02:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f7b3920c90 nl80211: Enable more AP callbacks for non-hostapd AP mode
Some of these are required for proper functionality (like
get_seqnum); others may not be needed yet, but including them
allows some extra ifdef/endif blocks to be removed.
2011-05-27 18:54:36 +03:00
Eliad Peller
257da77362 nl80211: Implement set_rate_sets for non-hostapd AP case
.set_rate_sets is not defined for non-hostapd, which prevents
configuring basic_rates when working as P2P GO.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-05-27 18:41:46 +03:00
Ken Zhu
41fd1d9e9a atheros: Fix auth_alg configuration for static WEP
When IEEE 802.1X is not enabled, driver_atheros.c needs to know how
to set authentication algorithms for static WEP.
2011-05-20 18:27:53 +03:00
Vinay Adella
86795546f7 WPS UPnP: Fix UPnP initialization for non-bridge case with some drivers
If the driver wrapper is setting up the interface up only at commit(),
UPnP initialization fails. Fix that by moving UPnP setup to happen after
the driver commit() call.
2011-05-19 12:55:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fa5165586f WPS: Add a workaround for Windows 7 capability discovery for PBC
Windows 7 uses incorrect way of figuring out AP's WPS capabilities by
acting as a Registrar and using M1 from the AP. The config methods
attribute in that message is supposed to indicate only the configuration
method supported by the AP in Enrollee role, i.e., to add an external
Registrar. For that case, PBC shall not be used and as such, the
PushButton config method is removed from M1 by default. If pbc_in_m1=1
is included in the configuration file, the PushButton config method is
left in M1 (if included in config_methods parameter) to allow Windows 7
to use PBC instead of PIN (e.g., from a label in the AP).
2011-05-17 19:53:02 +03:00
Ben Greear
60eda5e47d Better messages when channel cannot be used in AP mode
Log messages letting user know that the channel cannot
be used because it is flagged unusable.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-05-16 22:01:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
46957a9b2d nl80211: Filter out duplicated BSS table entries from scan results
cfg80211 maintains separate BSS table entries for APs if the same
BSSID,SSID pair is seen on multiple channels. wpa_supplicant does
not use frequency as a separate key in the BSS table, so filter out
duplicated entries. Prefer associated BSS entry in such a case in
order to get the correct frequency into the BSS table.
2011-05-16 19:18:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f5a8d42229 nl80211: Fetch assoc_freq from scan table for connect event
When kernel-based SME is used, use the scan table to find a BSS entry
for the associated AP when processing connected event.
2011-05-16 18:35:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b8281964af Add workaround for race condition with AssocResp TX status
It may take some time for the TX status to be delivered for a
(Re)Association Response frame and if any Data frames are received
during that time, they may end up getting dropped as Class 3 frames in
not-associated state. This results in a Disassociation frame being sent
to the station and it assuming that the association has been lost.

Work around the issue by remembering that the (Re)Association Request
has already been accepted and skip the Deauth/Disassoc sending because
of the possible Class 3 frames before the TX status callback is
received.
2011-04-15 19:26:28 +03:00
Yi Zhu
ca79385ab5 bsd: Add support for setting HT values in IFM_MMASK 2011-04-14 22:22:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fe655a8402 Add sanity checks for fseek and ftell return values
In theory, these calls could fail, but it is not really likely to
happen in practice in the use case here. Anyway, check that they do
not return an error before accepting the length of the file.
2011-04-14 20:22:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c8d88a145b WPS: Fix off-by-one check in vendor extension parsing 2011-04-14 20:02:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
35530d1472 driver_test: Check set_ssid len before trying to hexdump the SSID 2011-04-14 19:52:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6e432d3f10 WPS: Use strict validation of (Re)AssocReq only if IEs are known 2011-04-14 02:58:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0bdaa741cd OpenSSL: Use consistent SSL_get_app_data validation in tls_verify_cb
The returned value cannot really be NULL, but better keep this
function consistent on whether the returned value is checked or not.
2011-04-14 02:50:52 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
066608f3ff Avoid theoretical NULL pointer dereference during TLS reassemble
This function does not get called with in_data == NULL in practice, but
it seems to be at least partly prepared for that case, so better make it
consistent by handling the NULL value throughout the function.
2011-04-14 02:45:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b211f3eb71 Add sanity checks to EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ event data
Both the SA and IEs from the received Probe Request frames must be
included and the Probe Request RX callback functions may assume that
these are not NULL.
2011-04-14 02:39:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2a522e7192 Avoid theoretical NULL pointer dereference from debug code
The change to use wpa_dbg() in wpa_sm_parse_own_wpa_ie() could result
in a NULL pointer dereference if the function were called when WPA
state machine has not been initialized. While this cannot really
happen in practice, it is better to be prepared for that since that
was the case before the wpa_dbg() change.
2011-04-14 02:32:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
74727a7b32 Use type cast to get rid of implicit sign extension
The size_t value here can be 64-bit and result in implicit sign
extension. In this particular case, that gets masked out by
host_to_be32(), so there is no practical difference, but it is better
to get rid of the 64-bit variable explicitly.
2011-04-14 01:27:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f8b5f7dc6b TNC: Fix TNC_{TNCC,TNCS}_ReportMessageTypes copy type
The supportedTypes parameter is a list of TNC_MessageType values
and the buffer to be copied should use size of TNC_MessageType, not
TNC_MessageTypeList. In practice, these are of same length on most
platforms, so this is not a critical issue, but anyway, the correct
type should be used.
2011-04-13 23:10:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a04bf77209 TDLS: Validate FTIE length before processing it
This avoids reading past the end of the IE buffer should the FTIE
be too short. In addition, one debug hexdump was using uninitialized
pointer to the FTIE buffer, so fixed it to use the pointer from the
parse data.
2011-04-13 22:14:22 +03:00
Yi Zhu
d4a747f006 bsd: Fix buffer size for routing socket with IPv6 disabled
AF_INET6 is not always enabled by default, so use AF_INET instead. In
addition, use the old fixed length, 2048, as a failover value if the
sysctl fails for any reason.
2011-04-12 23:09:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
df13a1cdff Fix WPS AP mode regression
Commit 03d3f28a69 broke initialization of
EAPOL authenticator state machines since an error value from
wpa_auth_sta_key_mgmt() (-1) was not handled properly and the fixed
wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_psk() identified the value as a PSK-based AKM because
of all bits being set to 1. The special error value needs to handled
separately to avoid skipping EAPOL state machine initialization.
2011-04-11 19:22:49 +03:00
Adam Kent
4bb3377bc5 Fix #ifdef check for older openssl versions
Small compile fix for older versions of openssl that do not have SHA256
support and hence do not define OPENSSL_NO_SHA256.
2011-04-11 18:37:12 +03:00
Per Ekman
0b04889f0d Remove references to time_t/time()/random()
Replace direct calls in AP mode code with os_*() wrappers.
2011-04-11 18:33:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
03d3f28a69 Fix wpa_key_mgmt_*() helper functions to handle multiple bits
These can be used in some cases with a bitfield having multiple
AKMs enabled (e.g., WPA-PSK and WPA-PSK-SHA256). Address those
cases by checking whether any of the matching AKM are included.
2011-04-08 19:11:54 +03:00
Mahesh Palivela
a1ca02927a atheros: Add support for IEEE 802.11w configuration 2011-04-08 12:06:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3f3602386e nl80211: Add support for auth_alg auto-selection with connect command
When the SME is in the driver or cfg80211, the automatic selection
of auth_alg is done by leaving out the NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE
attribute from the NL80211_CMD_CONNECT command.
2011-04-07 14:53:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d332e7083c TDLS: Disable teardown MIC validation workaround
This MIC is required to be correct if the keys are set, so reject
the message if it does not have a valid MIC.
2011-04-07 14:48:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d9040cdb10 Fix a typo in a MIB variable in hostapd ctrl_interface 2011-04-05 01:21:27 +03:00
Felix Fietkau
4378fc14eb nl80211: Send EAPOL frames as QoS data frames for QoS aware clients
This should fix EAPOL reauthentication and rekeying timeout issues
with Intel clients when using WMM (e.g., with IEEE 802.11n). These
stations do not seem to be able to handle EAPOL data frames as
non-QoS Data frames after the initial setup.

This adds STA flags to hapd_send_eapol() driver op to allow
driver_nl80211.c to mark the EAPOL frames as QoS Data frame
when injecting it through the monitor interface.
2011-04-02 22:03:05 +03:00
Paul Stewart
1c5c7273f5 driver: Function to directly poll signal quality
This provides a means for the supplicant to directly request signal
quality metrics from the driver. This is useful, for example for
background scan algorithms that might ask desire this information
out-of-band with CQM events.

Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-31 17:56:48 +03:00
Eliad Peller
72863ea7c6 P2P: add a missing 'return' after building IE from an empty string
When building IE from an empty string and CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is
not defined, redundant 2 bytes are being added to the string.

We have to return right after building the "dummy" string.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-03-30 17:08:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e4bf4db907 Work around SNonce updates on EAPOL-Key 1/4 retransmission
Some deployed supplicants update their SNonce for every receive
EAPOL-Key message 1/4 even when these messages happen during the
same 4-way handshake. Furthermore, some of these supplicants fail
to use the first SNonce that they sent and derive an incorrect PTK
using another SNonce that does not match with what the authenticator
is using from the first received message 2/4. This results in
failed 4-way handshake whenever the EAPOL-Key 1/4 retransmission
timeout is reached. The timeout for the first retry is fixed to
100 ms in the IEEE 802.11 standard and that seems to be short
enough to make it difficult for some stations to get the response
out before retransmission.

Work around this issue by increasing the initial EAPOL-Key 1/4
timeout by 1000 ms (i.e., total timeout of 1100 ms) if the station
acknowledges reception of the EAPOL-Key frame. If the driver does
not indicate TX status for EAPOL frames, use longer initial
timeout (1000 ms) unconditionally.
2011-03-29 17:39:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2fee890af7 Add driver capa flag for EAPOL TX status and store capa in hostapd 2011-03-29 17:36:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b67d0d9e4b P2P: Store more WPS attributes for peers
Store Manufacturer, Model Name, Model Number, and Serial Number
attributes for P2P peers and expose these through the existing
peer information mechanisms.
2011-03-28 15:27:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b6e0180035 P2P: Add more WPS attributes into Listen state Probe Response
Configure more WPS attributes in the P2P module and use them
when generating WSC IE for Probe Response frames in Listen state.
2011-03-28 15:24:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b8f64582e3 TDLS: Allow TDLS to be disabled at runtime for testing purposes
Control interface command 'SET tdls_disabled <1/0>' can now be used
to disable/enable TDLS at runtime. This is mainly for testing
purposes.
2011-03-24 20:44:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
21bdbe38be nl80211: Implement deauth for IBSS as leave IBSS command 2011-03-23 21:15:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3c183894d4 Make GKeyDoneStations counting able to recover from mismatches
Previously, a bug in GKeyDoneStations count would remain in effect
until the authenticator is restarted. Make this more robust by
clearing the station count before each rekeying setup. While this
is not really supposed to be needed, there has been bugs in this
area in the past and it is safer to make the implementation recover
from such an issue automatically.
2011-03-23 17:06:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2ade8ef296 Decrement GKeyDoneStations in WPA authenticator when STA is freed
If the STA to be freed is still included in GKeyDoneStations count,
decrement the count when the STA is freed. This does not happen in
AP mode since there is enough time to go through the authenticator
state machine to clear the STA. However, in the current RSN IBSS
implementation, the authenticator state for the STA is freed in a
way that does not allow the state machine to go through the clearing.
To address this, make sure that wpa_free_sta_sm() decrements the
GKeyDoneStations count if the STA happened to be in the process of
GTK rekeying.
2011-03-23 17:00:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ef985058f4 nl80211: Use NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION event to indicate IBSS peer loss 2011-03-23 15:32:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d47fa330b8 random: Read /dev/random in the background with eloop read socket
This makes it more likely to be able to fetch the 20 octet seed from
/dev/random in cases where other programs may also be competing for
this.
2011-03-22 23:15:00 +02:00
Johannes Berg
c4bb881743 nl80211: Do not add interface to the global list in case of failure
This avoids leaving a freed interface on the global list in case
driver initialization fails.
2011-03-22 15:52:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cd9fc7869a hostapd: Add testing mode for RSN element extensions
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_RSN_TESTING in .config and rsn_testing=1 in
hostapd.conf can now be used to enable a testing mode that adds
extensions to RSN element. This can be used to check whether
station implementations are incompatible with future extensions
to the RSN element.
2011-03-21 13:59:05 +02:00
Sam Leffler
3e1996216e Add support for setting the syslog facility from the config file
This enables setting the syslog facility at build time.
2011-03-20 11:48:42 +02:00
Johannes Berg
c76e5d7f9b wpa_s AP mode: complete only when setup is complete
The AP code might, currently only in the case of HT40, defer actual
enabling to after a scan. In this case, the wpa_s AP code gets confused.
Add a callback for it to use and make it use it to finish only when the
setup has actually completed.

With appropriate hacks in place this allows using HT40 in P2P mode.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 13:11:15 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
046ef4aa67 P2P: Add option for requested device type in P2P search/scan
With this, p2p_find can be extended to find certain requested device
types.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:57:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
10c5d2a593 P2P: Use a single define for max number of vendor extensions 2011-03-19 12:22:24 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
6f2c060711 P2P: Keep track of peer WPS vendor extensions
Make the P2P code keep track of WPS vendor extensions received from
peers so they can be exposed via DBus later.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:22:21 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
f95cac271b P2P: Allow adding of WPS vendor extension attributes
This adds the ability to add WPS vendor extension attributes in P2P
frames, like GO Negotiation and Probe Response frames.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:22:18 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
4028a7fd43 WPS: Add support for adding WPS Vendor Extensions
This adds the ability to add WPS vendor extensions to an AP (or GO).
They will be added to the WSC IE(s) in Beacon and Probe Response frames.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-19 12:22:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f3cb52fb90 WPS: Move P2P extension generation for WSC IE in Beacon frames
This cleans up debug log by keeping the WSC IE attributes for Beacon
frames before starting to build the Probe Response frame.
2011-03-19 12:22:09 +02:00
Xi Chen
ea244d2156 IBSS RSN: Clear IBSS RSN peers based on peer lost events 2011-03-18 17:04:46 +02:00
Johannes Berg
2f646b6e83 WPS: Store (secondary) device type as binary
Instead of converting back and forth from the string representation,
always use the binary representation internally.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 18:50:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f2b3c6bc9c WPS: Add more debug information to PBC session overlap check 2011-03-17 18:04:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0439b08d3d WPS: Fix active PBC session removal to ignore MAC address
Use only the UUID-E to remove active PBC session(s) at the completion of
successful PBC protocol run. This fixes potential issues with Enrollees
that use multiple MAC addresses and as such, can get multiple entries in
the PBC session list.
2011-03-17 18:03:20 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
e57ae6e19e P2P: Keep track of secondary device types for peers
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 11:45:46 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
8e8c0df158 P2P: Add Secondary Device Type list in Probe Response frames
Add Secondary Device Type List attribute in WSC IE for P2P
Probe Response frames if one or more secondary device types
are configured.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 11:16:23 +02:00
Jean-Michel Bachot
a9e86bfb74 WPS: Add secondary device types into Probe Request frames
The secondary device type list is an optional attribute in the WSC IE.

Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-17 11:09:49 +02:00
Johannes Berg
ee7ab173c7 nl80211: Implement deauth/disassoc for non-HOSTAPD case
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-03-16 16:11:05 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
4f6bd86d07 hostapd: Don't force HT Mixed Mode for non-GF STAs
Currently hostapd will force HT Mixed Mode if at least one non-GF STA is
associated. This will force _all_ HT transmissions to be protected.

802.11n-2009 doesn't require HT Mixed Mode to be used in case of non-GF
STAs but instead the HT information element contains a flag if non-GF
STAs are present. All STAs are required to protect GF transmissions in
that case. Hence, setting HT Mixed mode if non-GF STAs are present is
superfluous.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-03-16 11:56:39 +02:00
Sujith Manoharan
ec2b890981 HT: Skip ht_capab validation if ieee80211n=0
There is no point in running through the 40 MHz scan if HT is
actually disabled regardless of whether the ht_capab parameter
is set.
2011-03-16 11:22:40 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
c6a3a11048 Check select() return value in wpa_ctrl_request()
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-03-15 15:54:21 +02:00
Paul Stewart
cf83fb0b5b wpa_supplicant: Add wpa_supplicant_get_eap_mode method
Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-15 13:53:08 +02:00
Paul Stewart
c83e2e1c45 eapol_supp: Request EAP method from EAP state machine
Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-15 13:49:26 +02:00
Paul Stewart
8813e4d57e eap_peer: Add method to return current method name
If there is an active EAP method, return its name.

Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
2011-03-15 13:47:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e17a2477db nl80211: Extend bridge add/del operations for secondary BSSes
Previously, only the main interface was added to a bridge. Extend this
to apply to all configured BSSes.
2011-03-15 13:02:49 +02:00
Ken Zhu
7099861e4e atheros: Fix default TX key index setting for WEP 2011-03-11 17:55:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
61fbd3df04 Fix couple of typos in comments 2011-03-11 12:12:36 +02:00
Chao-Wen Yang
3152ff421e WPS: Indicate PBC session overlap in wps_pbc return value
Use a specific return value, WPS-PBC-OVERLAP, to indicate a reason
for rejecting a wps_pbc command in wpa_supplicant AP mode if the
PBC mode cannot be started due to PBC session overlap having been
detected during monitor time.
2011-03-10 18:59:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3cc002ff97 WPS: Ignore PBC session overlap if a specific Enrollee is selected
This allows the user to complete WPS provisioning using PBC by
selected a specific Enrollee even if there are other Enrollees
in active PBC mode at the same time. The other Enrollees will be
rejected should they try to connect at the same time.
2011-03-10 18:51:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
80e75578c4 WPS: Show the received UUID-E from Probe Request in debug log
This makes it easier to debug PBC session overlap issues.
2011-03-10 18:38:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b0dc4155c3 WPS: Use only UUID-E in PBC session overlap detection on Registrar
Ignore possible mismatches in the source address of the frame and only
use UUID-E to check whether a Probe Request or M1 is from the same
Enrollee when figuring out whether there is PBC session overlap. This
is needed to avoid potential issues with Enrollee devices that may have
multiple interfaces indicating active PBC state.
2011-03-10 18:33:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b8fb017272 TDLS: Add tdls_testing 0x400 for ignoring AP prohibit TDLS 2011-03-06 14:54:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
52c9e6f3f5 TDLS: Do not allow setup to be started if AP prohibits TDLS 2011-03-06 14:54:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fb12d186b6 TDLS: Add tdls_testing 0x200 for declining TDLS Setup Response 2011-03-06 14:54:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94377fbc52 TDLS: Allow wpa_cli tdls_setup to start renegotiation
If there is already a link the requested peer, request start of
renegotiation instead of completely new link. This seems to be needed
to allow some driver to accept the trigger for a new negotiation.
2011-03-06 14:54:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ad79dba127 TDLS: Add testing mode for disabling TPK expiration
tdls_testing 0x104 can now be used to disable expiration of TPK
(0x100) and to use a short lifetime when initiating link (0x4).
2011-03-06 14:54:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0c4268eb27 TDLS: Add testing code for concurrent initiation
tdls_testing 0x80 can now be used to request wpa_supplicant to send
a TDLS Setup Request frame (i.e., try to initiate TDLS setup)
whenever a TDLS Setup Request frame has been received from a peer.
2011-03-06 14:54:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
43291b683c TDLS: Fix higher/lower MAC address check for concurrent init
The logic here was reversed: the STA with lower MAC address is the
one that continues as the initiator.
2011-03-06 14:54:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a8b2c2d657 TDLS: Tear down old link when receiving TDLS Setup Request 2011-03-06 14:54:34 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2a469a6b56 TDLS: Add tdls_testing flag (bit 6) for testing long TPK lifetime 2011-03-06 14:54:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1c0b2ad1ce TDLS: Use more thorough validation of TPK handshake 2011-03-06 14:54:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f0bfbe2a6c TDLS: Replace os_memset() of all peer data with safer approach
Blindly clearing all struct wpa_tdls_peer members is a risky
operation since it could easily clear pointers to allocated
memory, etc. information that really should not be removed.
Instead of hoping that new code gets added here to restore
the important variables, reverse the approach and only clear
structure members one by one when needed.
2011-03-06 14:54:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c61f3e5544 TDLS: Remove unnecessary storing of Link ID IE in peer data 2011-03-06 14:54:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3f466ec9e3 TDLS: Fix terminology to match with IEEE 802.11z 2011-03-06 14:54:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a4c3e4b194 TDLS: Move TPK M1 sending to a separate function
Now all there TPK handshake messages are sent in similar functions
and are easier to find from the source code.
2011-03-06 14:54:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2e1d335e44 TDLS: Allow unencrypted network negotiation through wpa_supplicant
This allows the same code path to be used for both protected and
unprotected configurations to limit need for duplicated code in
both the driver and wpa_supplicant.
2011-03-06 14:54:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9fe6e4b4db TDLS: Clean up and fix Key Lifetime processing
This adds code for validating that the same Key Lifetime is used
throughout TPK handshake and enables TPK lifetime expiration and
renewal/teardown. These part seem to be working, but the actual
handling of TDLS Setup Confirm and renewal are not fully
functional yet.
2011-03-06 14:54:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6b192bc346 TDLS: Add new testing modes for TPK lifetime testing
tdls_testing bits:
bit 3 = use short TPK lifetime (301 seconds)
bit 4 = use wrong TPK lifetime in TDLS Setup Response
bit 5 = use wrong TPK lifetime in TDLS Setup Confirm
2011-03-06 14:54:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
40cf22e6ff TDLS: Clear peer entries on association/disassociation
Since the TDLS links are allowed only to STAs that are in the same
BSS with us, clear all peer data whenever the BSS may have changed.
2011-03-06 14:53:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5b0e6ece54 TDLS: Add a special testing feature for changing TDLS behavior
These special test cases can be configured at run time with "wpa_cli
tdls_testing <value>" where <value> is an integer (either as a decimal
or as a hex value with 0x prefix) bitmap of special features with
following bits available at this point:
bit 0 = long frame (add dummy subelement to make FTIE very long)
bit 1 = use alternative RSN IE (different RSN capab value and no extra
replay counters)
bit 2 = send incorrect BSSID in Link Identifier of TDLS Setup Request
(e.g., 1 = long FTIE, 2 = different RSN IE, 3 = both of those)

This is disabled by default and can be enabled for the build by
adding the following line to .config:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_TDLS_TESTING
2011-03-06 14:53:54 +02:00
Ganesh Prasadh
281ff0aa76 TDLS: Add initial support for TDLS (IEEE Std 802.11z-2010) 2011-03-06 14:53:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
23ab8e863f Clear PeerKey pointer on deinit 2011-03-06 14:52:52 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
a4dc6e1934 atheros: Add support for setting RSN/WPS IEs in Beacon/Probe Resp 2011-03-06 14:31:59 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
39b08b5fc0 Indicate assoc vs. reassoc in association event
This allows driver wrappers to indicate whether the association was
done using Association Request/Response or with Reassociation
Request/Response frames.
2011-03-06 14:31:46 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
d7956add9c FT: Make FT-over-DS configurable (hostapd.conf ft_over_ds=0/1) 2011-03-06 14:31:42 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c0647147c1 Add defines for Valgrind client requests
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_VALGRIND can now be used to enable support for
Valgrind client requests to help in removing some non-issues from
Valgrind reports. This is mainly aimed at allowing unknown ioctl
results to be marked as defined data.
2011-03-06 14:31:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0fa0ad4e17 eloop: Fix integer overflow in long timeouts
If the os_time_t variable used for the expiration time (seconds)
overflows when the registered timeout value is being added,
assume that the event would happen after an infinite time, i.e.,
would not really happen in practice. This fixes issues with
long key timeouts getting converted to immediate expiration due
to the overflow.
2011-03-06 14:31:20 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
9fc6aa9f95 Add Android make files for hostapd and wpa_supplicant 2011-02-27 19:19:43 +02:00
Iain Hibbert
8ce58ceb25 Avoid preprocessor directives in macro arguments
os_snprintf() can be a preprocessor macro and according to
C99 (6.10.3 clause 11) the results of having preprocessor directives
inside the macro arguments is undefined.
2011-02-27 18:59:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
73304dbf65 Allow client control socket location to be overridden
Build options can now be used to replace the location of client
sockets for UNIX domain socket control interface:

CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_CTRL_IFACE_CLIENT_DIR=\"/tmp\"
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_CTRL_IFACE_CLIENT_PREFIX=\"wpa_ctrl_\"
2011-02-27 18:35:33 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
b3f3865e0e Use Android reserved namespace for control interface
On Android, use a special reserved namespace for the UNIX domain
socket.
2011-02-27 18:19:17 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
1480633f96 Use longer timeout in wpa_ctrl_request()
Wait longer for control interface response from wpa_supplicant to
avoid issues with some drivers that have long blocking operations.
2011-02-27 17:08:15 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
36fde1e79c Make wpa_ctrl_close() handle unopened connection 2011-02-27 17:07:07 +02:00
Masashi Honma
28878f8b0e bsd: Use correct size for routing socket
The buffer size for routing socket is fixed to 2048.
This patch fix it to obtain the size from OS.

This patch worked on x86 platform with NetBSD 5.0.2.
2011-02-27 14:01:39 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
4e2ead7a72 Add wpa_supplicant state change event for Android network manager
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-02-26 13:20:16 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
2a0cd0670b OpenSSL: Add access to Android certificates
This allows keystore:// prefix to be used with client_cert and
private_key configuration parameters.

Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-02-26 12:08:20 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
193f439a8c Add CONFIG_ANDROID_LOG support
This makes wpa_printf() calls use __android_log_vprint(). In addition,
hexdumps are commented out.
2011-02-25 16:44:34 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
1a13534f17 Change executable permissions for Android
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2011-02-25 16:21:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c4d4aebe69 wext: Do not include typedefs for Android build
Android build gets __u32 and friends from
bionic/libc/kernel/arch-x86/asm/types.h and having the typedefs here
causes redefinition errors.
2011-02-25 13:36:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
47c64bfcc7 wext: Sync with linux/wireless.h from wireless-testing.git
This updates the Linux wireless extensions header file to be based
on the latest version (22).
2011-02-25 13:29:52 +02:00
Johannes Berg
56eeb8f299 P2P: Add method to signal lost device
This signal is used to notify users of the P2P
state machine or wpa_supplicant of lost devices.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 22:22:16 +02:00
Johannes Berg
c165d81eea P2P: Add p2p_get_peer_found to get peer info
This will only retrieve information about peers that have been fully
discovered, not peers that are only half-discovered based on their Probe
Request frames.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 22:05:22 +02:00
Johannes Berg
8fd7dc1b1c P2P: Add new_device flag to dev_found callback
The DBus code will want to have perfect matching of dev_found and the
dev_lost it adds so it doesn't need to keep track internally. Enable
that with a new flag in the core that tracks whether we have already
notified about this -- the existing users can ignore it.

The part where this is always set to 1 if the new device is discovered
by a driver that has P2P in the driver is buggy -- the driver should
feed the P2P peer database and then that should feed the notification
here instead.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 21:59:58 +02:00
Konguraj(Raj) Kulanthaivel
c5db8e5170 P2P: Embed publically visible struct in peer info
This embeds some information about each P2P peer that will be publically
visible in a struct that is shared.

The dev_found notification function is also passed the new struct, which
requires some work for the driver-based P2P management.

Signed-off-by: Konguraj(Raj) Kulanthaivel <konguraj.kulanthaivel@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Fabien Marotte <fabienx.marotte@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-24 21:51:17 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
e926bcffd8 hostapd: Inherit correct MAC address for AP VLAN interfaces
When using multiple vifs and dynamic vlan tagging is enabled on any
interface, the created AP VLAN interfaces get the BSSID of the first
AP mode interface instead of the BSSID of the corresponding AP mode
interface.

Example:

wlan0 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x0
wlan1 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x1

Assume a STA connects to the AP interface wlan1 and gets a dynamic
VLAN tag 100 assigned by the RADIUS server. Hostapd will create an AP
VLAN interface wlan1.100 but doesn't set an address for this interface
which results in wlan1.100 getting the same address as wlan0:

wlan1.100 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x0

As a result the STA that was moved to wlan1.100 isn't able to finish its
4-way handshake since mac80211 won't pass its frames to wlan1.100 due to
the different address.

To fix this issue make use of the address of the AP interface when
creating an AP VLAN interface.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-02-24 21:25:40 +02:00
Ben Greear
24d75245bd AP: Update logging related to inactivity and disassociation
Add MAC addresses for stations and use wpa_msg instead of printf
methods to make it easier to grep logs and find messages for the
station in question.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-24 17:44:45 +02:00
Ben Greear
1aae01fc04 Add more wpa_auth debugging messages 2011-02-24 17:35:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
effab86ff2 Remove unneeded OpenSSL error messages from key/cert parsing
If parsing of the certificate or private key succeeds using any of
the tried encoding types, clear the OpenSSL error queue without
showing the pending errors in debug log since they do not really
provide any useful output and can be confusing.
2011-02-22 22:19:55 +02:00
Raghunathan Kailasanathan
58708b3bd1 nl80211: Use nl_atype() from libnl
libnl provides nla_type() which can be used to derive nla_type from
struct nlattr.
2011-02-22 21:48:49 +02:00
Guy Eilam
e4ac6417c7 utils: Corrected a typo in header's name definition
Corrected a typo in the BASE64_H definition that
might cause the header file to be included more than once.

Signed-off-by: Guy Eilam <guy@wizery.com>
2011-02-21 22:44:46 +02:00
Christian Lamparter
6fc34d9fe5 Increase internal TLSs client key exchange buffer
This patch fixes a problem I had when I tried to connect
an embedded system [wpa_supplicant, CONFIG_TLS=internal]
to my TLS secured network.

TLSv1: Send CertificateVerify
TLSv1: CertificateVerify hash - hexdump(len=36): ha .. ha
PKCS #1: pkcs1_generate_encryption_block - Invalid buffer lengths \
                        (modlen=512 outlen=454 inlen=36)

It turned out that a fixed 1000 byte message buffer was just
a little bit too small for the 4096 bit RSA certificates
I'm using.

Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2011-02-21 18:25:34 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
f39b07d7ed hostapd: Allow coexistance of HT BSSes with WEP/TKIP BSSes
In multi BSS setups it wasn't possible to set up an HT BSS in
conjunction with a WEP/TKIP BSS. HT needed to be turned off entirely
to allow WEP/TKIP BSSes to be used.

In order to allow HT BSSes to coexist with non-HT WEP/TKIP BSSes add a
new BSS conf attribute "disable_11n" which disables HT capabilities on a
single BSS by suppressing HT IEs in the beacon and probe response
frames. Furthermore, mark all STAs associated to a WEP/TKIP BSS as
non-HT STAs. The disable_11n parameter is used internally; no new entry
is parsed from hostapd.conf.

This allows a non-HT WEP/TKIP BSS to coexist with a HT BSS without
having to disable HT mode entirely. Nevertheless, all STAs associated to
the WEP/TKIP BSS will only be served as if they were non-HT STAs.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-02-21 17:27:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
55bce124e5 FT: Fix FT-EAP to set EAPOL Authenticator into authenticated state
This is needed to avoid the EAPOL Authenticator from trying to start
new authentication when FT protocol is used. [Bug 384]
2011-02-20 21:56:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7e0318505c FT: Specify source MAC address for RRB messages
Use l2_packet with Ethernet header included so that the source
address for RRB packets can be forced to be the local BSSID. This
fixes problems where unexpected bridge interface address may end
up getting used and the recipient of the frame dropping it as
unknown R0KH/R1KH.
2011-02-20 17:50:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6603a96602 Flush STA entries in hostapd when clearing STAs from kernel
This is needed to keep kernel and hostapd in sync. In addition,
the obsolete entry in hostapd prevented use of Deauthentication
or Disassociation frame with reason code 6/7 mechanism to indicate
to the STA that there is no association if the STA missed the
broadcast Deauthentication frame for any reason.
2011-02-10 22:31:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e3e52e364e hostapd: Fix RADIUS client configuration update on reconfig
The internal pointer to RADIUS client configuration needs to be
updated whenever a new hostapd configuration is loaded. Without
this, freed memory may be dereferenced and this can result in
segmentation faults.
2011-02-10 22:12:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
810f08bab4 Make sure reserved field in WMM IE is set to 0
This was previously left uninitialized for Beacon frames and could
potentially have any value.
2011-02-10 22:10:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
50b16da13f Fix CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y build 2011-02-10 20:24:06 +02:00
Ben Greear
f049052b9e Use wpa_msg() instead of wpa_printf()
This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order
to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages.

A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow
CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is
otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout
debugging is disabled.
2011-02-10 20:14:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2944824315 hostapd: Add require_ht configuration parameter
This can be used to configure hostapd to reject association with
any station that does not support HT PHY.
2011-02-09 15:08:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e67b55fb11 wpa_s AP: Deliver EVENT_RX_PROBE_REQ events to AP processing
This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work
with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This
code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not
have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it
registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
2011-02-08 14:32:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d601247ca9 P2P: Allow WPS_PBC command on GO to select on P2P Device Address
An optional parameter, p2p_dev_addr, can now be given to WPS_PBC
command on P2P GO to indicate that only the P2P device with the
specified P2P Device Address is allowed to connect using PBC. If
any other device tries to use PBC, a session overlap is indicated
and the negotiation is rejected with M2D. The command format for
specifying the address is "WPS_PBC p2p_dev_addr=<address>", e.g.,
WPS_PBC p2p_dev_addr=02:03:04:05:06:07

In addition, show the PBC session overlap indication as a WPS failure
event on an AP/GO interface. This particular new case shows up as
"WPS-FAIL msg=4 config_error=12".
2011-02-07 18:28:36 +02:00
Ben Greear
4f1495aefa Add interface name to wpa_msg() output
This makes log files much more readable if multiple interfaces
are being controlled by the same process. The interface name is
added to stdout/file/syslog entries, but not to the messages
sent to control interface monitors to avoid issues with parsing
in external programs.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-06 20:39:34 +02:00
Ben Greear
ac6912b5d1 wpa_supplicant: Support 'relog' command to re-open log files
This allows rolling log files:

mv log.txt log.txt.1
wpa_cli relog

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2011-02-06 20:15:19 +02:00
Johannes Berg
0c11c63375 util: Add compact MAC address formatting/parsing
The P2P DBus interface will use addresses for
DBus paths, and uses them without any separators.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-02 17:11:00 +02:00
Johannes Berg
0661eed204 AP: Add callback for STA authorized transitions
Add a callback for station's authorized transitions
to allow wpa_supplicant to emit events in DBus.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-02 16:56:59 +02:00
Johannes Berg
6905dcb1e0 AP: Introduce sta authorized wrappers
To enable making state change notifications on the WLAN_STA_AUTHORIZED
flag, introduce ap_sta_set_authorized(), and to reduce use of the flag
itself also add a wrapper for testing the flag: ap_sta_is_authorized().

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-02 16:52:32 +02:00
Johannes Berg
89e07afb2c nl80211: Use max_remain_on_chan data from nl80211
If the driver advertises max_remain_on_chan data, use it instead of
the hardcoded value of 5000. Keep the default at 5000 since that is the
value used by earlier versions of cfg80211/mac80211 and not advertised
in nl80211 for those.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-02-01 18:18:32 +02:00
Eliad Peller
f14f5141a0 nl80211: Remove excessive nl80211_set_mode() call
When authenticating, and the interface type is not already
NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION, we need to call wpa_driver_nl80211_set_mode()
only once. Remove the excessive call.

Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
2011-02-01 16:38:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7615078caf AP: Make sure ieee80211n_allowed_ht40_channel_pair() gets called
We need to call this function after having completed the neighboring
channel scan to figure out whether HT40 can be used and if so, which
channel is the secondary channel.
2011-02-01 16:09:26 +02:00
Nishant Sarmukadam
1b4d379366 AP: Ensure ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab() gets called to check ht caps
ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab is called after ieee80211n_check_40mhz in
function hostapd_check_ht_capab. ieee80211n_check_40mhz can return 1 in
a valid scenario where the initialization is completed in a callback. In
this case ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab is skipped and hostapd does not
check the ht capabilities reported by the driver. Fix this issue making
sure ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab gets called.

Signed-off-by: Nishant Sarmukadam <nishants@marvell.com>
2011-02-01 16:04:59 +02:00
Johannes Berg
d2da224948 AP: Enable WMM with default parameters by default for HT
If WMM is not disabled explicitly (wmm_enabled=0 in hostapd.conf),
enable WMM automatically whenever HT (ieee80211n) is enabled. Use
the default WMM parameters for AP TX queues and the EDCA parameters
advertised for stations in WMM IE if no overriding values are
included in the configuration.
2011-02-01 14:34:12 +02:00
Johannes Berg
9f51b11395 nl80211: use P2P interface types
We can use the P2P interface types to check if the driver supports P2P
and to tell the kernel that a given interface is going to be used for
P2P (when it is created).

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2011-01-31 21:49:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
df077c6262 Remove obsolete drivers wrappers: atmel, ndiswrapper, ipw, hermes
There is no real reason to maintain these in the current development
branch anymore. If someone really needs support for the obsolete
driver interfaces, these can be found in older wpa_supplicant
branches.

driver_atmel.c
- vendor-specific interface for ATMEL AT76C5XXx cards
- for some old out-of-tree driver; not for the upstream atmel*
  drivers

driver_ndiswrapper.c
- vendor-specific interface for an out-of-tree driver
- ndiswrapper should work with driver_wext.c, too

driver_ipw.c
- vendor-specific interface for old ipw2100/2200 driver
- the upstream driver works with driver_wext.c (and does not work
  with the old interface)

driver_hermes.c
- vendor driver that was not even included in the main wpa_supplicant
  releases
2011-01-30 21:29:25 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
f1bed4a70d nl80211: Make use of the ht opmode bss attribute
In order to enable protection mechanisms for different HT opmodes the
driver needs to be aware of the current HT opmode that is calculated by
hostapd. Hence, pass the current opmode to the nl80211 driver via
the bss attribute NL80211_ATTR_BSS_HT_OPMODE.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2011-01-30 21:16:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1161ff1ef5 hostapd: Allow TDLS use to be prohibited in the BSS
tdls_prohibit=1 and tdls_prohibit_chan_switch=1 and now be used to
disable use of TDLS or TDLS channel switching in the BSS using
extended cabilities IE as defined in IEEE 802.11z.
2011-01-28 19:21:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dfaeda0492 Fix couple of compiler warnings about uninitialized variables 2011-01-26 21:29:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cbcf92b42f AP: Validate management frame length
Make sure that received management frames are long enough before
processing them. This avoids a potential segmentation fault if a
driver delivers an invalid frame all the way to hostapd.
2011-01-17 12:21:29 +02:00
Dan Harkins
e4d7b22a53 EAP-pwd: Fix some interoperability issues
The changes are:

  1. the word "and" in the hunting-and-pecking string passed to the KDF
     should be capitalized.
  2. the primebitlen used in the KDF should be a short not an int.
  3. the computation of MK in hostap is based on an older version of the
     draft and is not the way it's specified in the RFC.
  4. the group being passed into computation of the Commit was not in
     network order.
2011-01-16 13:12:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b13d3d63d5 EAP-pwd: Use os_free to free memory allocated with os_malloc
The direct use of free() caused a crash with CONFIG_WPA_TRACE=y.
2011-01-16 13:02:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bc8318acbc WPA: Add more info for EAPOL-Key Nonce/MIC debugging 2011-01-15 16:57:08 +02:00
Chao-Wen Yang
c5cf0a18f1 WPS: Add mechanism for indicating non-standard WPS errors
Previously, only the Configuration Error values were indicated in
WPS-FAIL events. Since those values are defined in the specification
it is not feasible to extend them for indicating other errors. Add
a new error indication value that is internal to wpa_supplicant and
hostapd to allow other errors to be indicated.

Use the new mechanism to indicate if negotiation fails because of
WEP or TKIP-only configurations being disallows by WPS 2.0.
2011-01-13 17:50:59 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e24cf97c0d P2P: Check GO Neg Req retransmit limit in p2p_listen_end
This needs to be done both in the more normal location in
p2p_timeout_connect_listen() (internal timeout after driver event) and
in p2p_listen_end() as a workaround for the case where the driver event
is delayed to happen after the internal timeout.
2011-01-12 13:48:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
60ea8187c9 nl80211: Set NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES based on set_key addr
This allows mac80211 to configure default keys properly for RSN IBSS
mode.
2011-01-09 19:54:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0382097ef3 Use set_key addr to distinguish default and multicast keys
Previously, both NULL and ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff addr were used in various
places to indicate default/broadcast keys. Make this more consistent
and useful by defining NULL to mean default key (i.e., used both for
unicast and broadcast) and ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff to indicate broadcast
key (i.e., used only with broadcast).
2011-01-09 19:44:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8546ea1930 nl80211: Avoid infinite loop when searching a BSS
When hostapd is removing a virtual BSS interface, the loop here was
incorrectly not updating the iterator during list traversal and
ended up in an infinite loop in some cases.
2011-01-09 19:18:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4d379f1243 Move hostap driver specific workaround into the driver wrapper 2011-01-09 12:50:57 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dff99f8ec1 Do not use set_tx=1 when clearing keys with set_key 2011-01-09 12:18:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
260832214e Use key=NULL when clearing PTK with set_key
The key clearing operations are using NULL everywhere else, so make
this consistent with other callers.
2011-01-09 12:12:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
da64c266e7 Use more consistent set_key seq value when nothing is being set
Use NULL instead of (u8 *) "" as the seq value and make sure the
driver wrapper implementations can handle NULL value. This was
previously already done in number of places, but not everywhere.
2011-01-09 12:09:04 +02:00
Shan Palanisamy
dcc8bf7808 atheros: Rename "madwifi_" prefix to "atheros_" 2010-12-30 16:14:28 +02:00
Yi Zhu
23763c6516 bsd: Fix receive buffer alignment issue
wpa_supplicant seems to crash from time to time on a NetBSD 4.0 MIPS
platform. The root cause turned out to be a MIPS alignment issue.

In my wpa_supplicant crash case, in function
wpa_driver_bsd_event_receive (from driver_bsd.c), the buf[2048] address
is started from i.e. 0x7fffd546, which is not 4 bytes aligned. Later
when it is casted to (struct if_msghdr *), and rtm->rtm_flags is used.
rtm->rtm_flags is "int" type, but its address is not 4 bytes aligned.
This is because the start address of rtm is not 4 bytes aligned.
Unfortunately in NetBSD MIPS kernel (unlike Linux MIPS kernel emulates
unaligned access in its exception handler), the default behavior is to
generate a memory fault to the application that accesses unaligned
memory address. Thus comes the early mentioned wpa_supplicant crash. An
interesting note is when I'm using the wpa_supplicant version 0.4.9, I
never saw this problem. Maybe the stack layout is different. But I
didn't look into details.

I used below patch to resolve this problem. Now it runs correctly for at
least several hours. But you might have a better fix (maybe we can use
malloc/free so that it is at least cache line aligned?). I'm also not
sure if other drivers should have the same problem.
2010-12-30 16:13:19 +02:00
Yi Zhu
9f2951d2fd Fix driver_bsd.c compile error
I got an error for WPA_KEY_RSC_LEN is not defined when compiling the
driver_bsd.c on NetBSD 4.0. Below patch fixed it.
2010-12-30 16:12:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3ac17eba31 P2P: Add initial support for driver-based P2P management
This adds partial callbacks and events to allow P2P management to be
implemented in a driver/firmware. This is not yet complete and is
very much subject to change in the future.
2010-12-30 12:48:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f981eabcf0 WPS: Add option to disable open networks by default
CONFIG_WPS_REG_DISABLE_OPEN=y can be used to configure wpa_supplicant
to disable open networks by default when wps_reg command is used to
learn the current AP settings. When this is enabled, there will be a
WPS-OPEN-NETWORK ctrl_iface event and the user will need to explicitly
enable the network (e.g., with "select_network <id>") to connect to
the open network.
2010-12-30 12:28:13 +02:00
Johannes Berg
5dfca53fc0 nl80211: Use driver-based off-channel TX if available
If the underlying driver supports off-channel TX, it will now be used by
the nl80211 driver wrapper, setting WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_OFFCHANNEL_TX
accordingly.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-29 14:05:34 +02:00
Johannes Berg
190b9062b2 P2P: Add option for offloading off-channel TX to the driver
With the new kernel functionality coming to Linux to allow off-channel
TX, we can take advantage of that in the P2P code that currently uses
remain-on-channel. If a driver advertises support for it, it will be
asked to handle off-channel TX by itself.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-29 13:59:17 +02:00
Johannes Berg
0d7e5a3a29 Allow AP mode to disconnect STAs based on low ACK condition
The nl80211 driver can report low ACK condition (in fact it reports
complete loss right now only). Use that, along with a config option, to
disconnect stations when the data connection is not working properly,
e.g., due to the STA having went outside the range of the AP. This is
disabled by default and can be enabled with disassoc_low_ack=1 in
hostapd or wpa_supplicant configuration file.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-28 17:15:01 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d3e01b9d71 Re-initialize EAP ClientTimeout on for each session
ClientTimeout changes from EAP peer methods were not supposed to
change behavior for other EAP peer methods or even other sessions
of the same method. Re-initialize ClientTimeout whenever an EAP
peer method is initialized to avoid this. This addresses problems
where WPS (EAP-WSC) reduces the timeout and consecutive EAP runs
may fail due to too small timeout.
2010-12-28 12:09:14 +02:00
Fabien Marotte
9dac8c3eaf P2P: Limit the retransmission of GO Negotiation request to 120
If the peer you want to connect to is no longer available (does not
acknowledge frames) when wpa_supplicant sends GO Negotition Request
frames, retransmission of this frame is done until the associated
p2p_device  structure is removed on timeout. In that case, no signal
is emitted to  inform the GO Negotiation has failed.

When sending an Invitation Request frame, the same retransmission
mechanism is in place but limit the transmission to 100 and hitting
the limit generates an event.

This patch adds the same mechanism as the one in place for Invitation
Request, but with limit of 120 to match the existing wait_count for
for GO Negotiation.
2010-12-28 11:48:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d19f5fc881 WPS: Include all Config Methods in Probe Request
Do not use active PBC state to figure out which ConfigMethods are
included in Probe Request; instead, include all supported ones.
2010-12-20 12:54:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
79c3124ce5 nl80211: Remove extra \n from debug messages 2010-12-19 12:00:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7d878ca769 Use SA Query procedure to recovery from AP/STA state mismatch
If a station received unprotected Deauthentication or Disassociation
frame with reason code 6 or 7 from the current AP, there may be a
mismatch in association state between the AP and STA. Verify whether
this is the case by using SA Query procedure. If not response is
received from the AP, deauthenticate.

This implementation is only for user space SME with
driver_nl80211.c.
2010-12-19 11:58:00 +02:00
Johannes Berg
5efa9e2a4b P2P: Allow access to group members
Some new code will require access to P2P group members, so add API to
retrieve the number of members and iterate the members themselves.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-12-17 18:34:16 +02:00
Sudhakar Swaminathan
231bbd0375 P2P: Unauthorize pending P2P GO Neg peer on p2p_cancel
If there is a pending GO Negotiation when p2p_cancel is used,
unauthorize the peer to avoid immediate reconnection from being
accepted without a new p2p_connect command.
2010-12-17 15:05:35 +02:00
Masashi Honma
2136f48020 nl80211: Stop driver init sooner if the interface does not exist 2010-12-17 13:55:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2397086869 nl80211: Add forgotten deinit code on failure path 2010-12-17 13:49:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
278ef89f3f nl80211: Sync definitions with wireless-testing.git 2010-12-17 13:07:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b3a6d9d400 wlantest: Add send command for injecting raw frames
This can be used by external programs (e.g., wlantest_cli) to inject
raw frames (hex dump of the frame header and body). The data can be
requested to be sent as-is or protected with the current key.
2010-12-16 16:11:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b993e77b5b Removed unused variable from non-Linux builds 2010-12-14 17:10:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aca0160548 nl80211: Set cipher suites when using user space SME
Previously, pairwise and group cipher suites were configured only
when kernel SME (nl80211 connect API) was used. However, mac80211
needs this information even in the user space SME case for one
thing: to disable HT when TKIP/WEP is used. Add
NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITES_PAIRWISE to fix this special case with
user space SME. This allows mac80211 to disable HT properly when
the AP is configured with configuration that is not allowed.
2010-12-13 21:08:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b39f58347d wlantest: Add support for decrypting TDLS frames
Derive TPK based on TDLS TPK Handshake and decrypt frames on the
direct link with TPK-TK.
2010-12-13 11:20:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
89c38e32c7 RSN IBSS: RX GTK configuration with nl80211
This add preliminary code for setting the per-STA RX GTK for
RSN IBSS when nl80211 drivers. For some reason, this does not
seem to fully work, but at least driver_nl80211.c is now aware of
what kind of key is being set and the whatever is missing from
making this key configuration go through should be specific to
nl80211/cfg80211.
2010-12-04 20:31:22 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
18d2ba083b nl80211: Generate EVENT_IBSS_RSN_START events
This is needed to trigger start of 4-way handshake when a new STA is
detected in an RSN IBSS.
2010-12-04 18:17:58 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
1df492df34 Do not send Deauth/Disassoc to unknown STA if SA is invalid
The frame needs to be sent from an individual (non-group) address,
so drop invalid frames before sending Deauth/Disassoc frames to
not associated STAs.
2010-12-04 17:40:36 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
c4d7fc90a2 Fix EAP-FAST PAC file writer to avoid crash with multiple PACs
One of the pointers to the PAC buffer was not updated after realloc
and if the realloc ended up returning new pointer, the *pos pointer
was still pointing at the old location (i.e., freed memory at
this point).
2010-12-04 11:37:41 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
482856c8ba nl80211: Fix compiler warnings on non-P2P build 2010-11-27 13:05:37 +02:00
Ben Greear
6859f1cb24 Enable sharing of scan result events among virtual interfaces
When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical
radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This
decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces.

This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based
drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface.

Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
2010-11-26 21:46:30 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f2ed8023c4 nl80211: Track used interfaces and support multiple P2P groups
Track all the P2P group interfaces within driver_nl80211.c to make
it easier to generate unique P2P Interface Addresses.
2010-11-26 18:14:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
871f4dd069 Allow driver wrappers to indicate whether result codes are sane
Some drivers are not providing exactly reliable error codes (e.g.,
with WEXT), but others may actually indicate reliable information.
Allow driver wrappers to indicate if that is the case and use
optimizations if so. For now, this improves nl80211 with
NL80211_CMD_CONNECT for a case where connection request fails.
2010-11-26 17:41:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
df89c1c8d1 nl80211: Add BSSID to NL80211_CMD_CONNECT assoc reject event 2010-11-26 17:40:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ce04af5a74 nl80211: Fix NL80211_CMD_CONNECT with WPA/WPS networks 2010-11-26 17:39:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c55f774d00 nl80211: Add preliminary code for testing separate P2P group interface
driver_param=use_p2p_group_interface=1 can now be used to test
nl80211-drivers with separate P2P group interface. In other words,
the main interface (e.g., wlan0) is reserved for P2P management
operations and non-P2P connections and a new group interface (e.g.,
p2p-wlan0-0) is created for the P2P group.

This implementation is very minimal, i.e., it only support address
allocation for a single P2P group interface (if the driver does not
handle this internally). In addition, not all functionality has yet
been tested, so for now, this is disabled by default and needs that
special driver_param to enable.
2010-11-26 15:54:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
971e357f19 P2P: Add new driver option for interface allocation
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_P2P_MGMT_AND_NON_P2P flag can now be used to
indicate that the initial interface (e.g., wlan0) is used for
P2P management operations and potentially non-P2P connections.
This is otherwise identical to
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_P2P_DEDICATED_INTERFACE, but the possibility of
non-P2P connections makes some operations differ.
2010-11-26 15:52:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
805253d820 random: Fix a compiler warning about unused variable
In CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y case, the error variable was not used.
2010-11-25 23:32:17 +02:00
Sudhakar Swaminathan
9d562b7946 P2P: Add p2p_unauthorize command
This can be used to remove authorization from a previous p2p_connect
commands that has not yet resulted in completed GO Negotiation.
2010-11-25 13:09:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7392f11e96 Convert most commonly used drv ops to real function calls
Getting rid of these inline functions seems to reduce the code size
quite a bit, so convert the most commonly used hostapd driver ops to
function calls.
2010-11-24 17:01:21 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0e8a96a911 Get rid of struct hostapd_driver_ops abstraction
This is not needed anymore and just makes things more difficult
to understand, so move the remaining function pointers to direct
function calls and get rid of the struct hostapd_driver_ops.
2010-11-24 16:50:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3acdf771b8 hostapd_driver_ops reduction
send_eapol, set_key, read_sta_data, sta_clear_stats,
set_radius_acl_auth, set_radius_acl_expire, and set_beacon
to use inline functions instead of extra abstraction.
2010-11-24 16:34:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
51e2a27a21 hostapd_driver_ops reduction
set_sta_vlan, get_inact_sec, sta_deauth, sta_disassoc, and sta_remove
to use inline functions instead of extra abstraction.
2010-11-24 15:36:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b5b1b18f39 hostapd_driver_ops reduction: set_countermeasures 2010-11-24 15:26:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cee7d66b1d hostapd: Start removing struct hostapd_driver_ops abstraction
Commit bf65bc638f started the path to
add this new abstraction for driver operations in AP mode to allow
wpa_supplicant to control AP mode operations. At that point, the
extra abstraction was needed, but it is not needed anymore since
hostapd and wpa_supplicant share the same struct wpa_driver_ops.

Start removing the unneeded abstraction by converting
send_mgmt_frame() to an inline function, hostapd_drv_send_mlme().
This is similar to the design that is used in wpa_supplicant and
that was used in hostapd in the past (hostapd_send_mgmt_frame()
inline function).
2010-11-24 15:19:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
719007f5c0 l2_packet: Use wpa_printf() instead of perror() 2010-11-24 15:00:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ebbec8b2fa nl80211: Fix send commands to return 0 on success
driver.h defines these functions to return 0 on success, not
number of bytes transmitted. Most callers are checking "< 0" for
error condition, but not all. Address this by following the driver
API specification on 0 meaning success.
2010-11-24 14:58:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
08704cd885 hostapd: Verify availability of random data when using WPA/WPA2
On Linux, verify that the kernel entropy pool is capable of providing
strong random data before allowing WPA/WPA2 connection to be
established. If 20 bytes of data cannot be read from /dev/random,
force first two 4-way handshakes to fail while collecting entropy
into the internal pool in hostapd. After that, give up on /dev/random
and allow the AP to function based on the combination of /dev/urandom
and whatever data has been collected into the internal entropy pool.
2010-11-24 13:08:03 +02:00
Masashi Honma
dbb6ed7e75 Fix memory leak on EAPOL Authenticator error path
wlan0: RADIUS No authentication server configured
MEMLEAK[0x999feb8]: len 1040
WPA_TRACE: memleak - START
[3]: ./hostapd(radius_msg_new+0x33) [0x8074f43]
     radius_msg_new() ../src/radius/radius.c:117
[4]: ./hostapd() [0x806095e]
     ieee802_1x_encapsulate_radius() ../src/ap/ieee802_1x.c:439
     ieee802_1x_aaa_send() ../src/ap/ieee802_1x.c:1496

For example, this error occured when I used WPS hostapd without
"eap_server=1" definition in configuration file.
2010-11-24 01:42:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bbb921daaa Maintain internal entropy pool for augmenting random number generation
By default, make hostapd and wpa_supplicant maintain an internal
entropy pool that is fed with following information:

hostapd:
- Probe Request frames (timing, RSSI)
- Association events (timing)
- SNonce from Supplicants

wpa_supplicant:
- Scan results (timing, signal/noise)
- Association events (timing)

The internal pool is used to augment the random numbers generated
with the OS mechanism (os_get_random()). While the internal
implementation is not expected to be very strong due to limited
amount of generic (non-platform specific) information to feed the
pool, this may strengthen key derivation on some devices that are
not configured to provide strong random numbers through
os_get_random() (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux/BSD).

This new mechanism is not supposed to replace proper OS provided
random number generation mechanism. The OS mechanism needs to be
initialized properly (e.g., hw random number generator,
maintaining entropy pool over reboots, etc.) for any of the
security assumptions to hold.

If the os_get_random() is known to provide strong ramdom data (e.g., on
Linux/BSD, the board in question is known to have reliable source of
random data from /dev/urandom), the internal hostapd random pool can be
disabled. This will save some in binary size and CPU use. However, this
should only be considered for builds that are known to be used on
devices that meet the requirements described above. The internal pool
is disabled by adding CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL=y to the .config file.
2010-11-24 01:29:40 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3642c4313a Annotate places depending on strong random numbers
This commit adds a new wrapper, random_get_bytes(), that is currently
defined to use os_get_random() as is. The places using
random_get_bytes() depend on the returned value being strong random
number, i.e., something that is infeasible for external device to
figure out. These values are used either directly as a key or as
nonces/challenges that are used as input for key derivation or
authentication.

The remaining direct uses of os_get_random() do not need as strong
random numbers to function correctly.
2010-11-24 01:05:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1bdb7ab3af Re-initialize GMK and Key Counter on first station connection
This adds more time for the system entropy pool to be filled before
requesting random data for generating the WPA/WPA2 encryption keys.
This can be helpful especially on embedded devices that do not have
hardware random number generator and may lack good sources of
randomness especially early in the bootup sequence when hostapd is
likely to be started.

GMK and Key Counter are still initialized once in the beginning to
match the RSN Authenticator state machine behavior and to make sure
that the driver does not transmit broadcast frames unencrypted.
However, both GMK (and GTK derived from it) and Key Counter will be
re-initialized when the first station connects and is about to
enter 4-way handshake.
2010-11-24 00:52:46 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3c7302c219 Report errors from key derivation/configuration
Eventually, these should be acted on, so at least get the return
values passed one layer up.
2010-11-23 01:05:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5cb9d5c3d1 Mix in more data to GTK/IGTK derivation
The example GMK-to-GTK derivation described in the IEEE 802.11 standard
is marked informative and there is no protocol reason for following it
since this derivation is done only on the AP/Authenticator and does not
need to match with the Supplicant. Mix in more data into the derivation
process to get more separation from GMK.
2010-11-23 00:57:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e3acc8f1c8 edit: Clear edit line on deinit 2010-11-21 12:07:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
566aef60ab edit: Limit maximum number of history entries to 100 2010-11-21 12:04:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
70de7d56fe edit: Implement history file read/write 2010-11-21 12:01:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
19ec1f262e edit: Fix history prev selection 2010-11-21 11:49:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8953e9681a edit: Move history save file specification to caller 2010-11-21 11:43:09 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ec9aac9468 edit: Use struct dl_list for history buffer 2010-11-21 11:25:34 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
31e1206baa edit: Fix delete_word when not in the end of line 2010-11-20 23:05:12 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
464144a43b edit: Add history buffer search
Ctrl-R can now be used to start history search mode.
2010-11-20 17:55:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
42034d6f60 edit: Clean up escape code parser 2010-11-20 16:59:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0bee81352f edit: Split escape code parsing into a separate function
This makes edit_read_char() simpler and easier to extend since it
does not need to know anything about the escape codes anymore.
2010-11-20 15:55:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ef6ee3e5a3 edit: Sort completion list 2010-11-20 12:41:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9364990ace edit: Really fix the completion of last character
The previous commit broke completion in various places. The proper
way of handling the completion of full word is to verify whether
there are more than one possible match at that point.
2010-11-20 12:27:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
414780027a edit: Fix completion at the last character
Completion needs to be done even if the full word has been entered.
In addition, fix the space-after-full-word to properly allocate room
for the extra character when completion is used in the middle of the
string.
2010-11-20 11:59:04 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
89eb6b774d edit: Fix delete word to update current position 2010-11-20 11:48:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e4f13f9256 edit: Fix completion of arguments other than the first one 2010-11-20 11:45:42 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
73669f1b03 edit: Fix Home/End escape codes 2010-11-20 11:20:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ef49bb80a9 wlantest: Add interactive mode to wlantest_cli 2010-11-20 10:48:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7302a35ed4 edit: Add string completion support on tab 2010-11-20 00:42:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7d23e971f0 wlantest: Add preliminary infrastructure for injecting frames
This adds new commands for wlantest_cli to request wlantest to
inject frames. This version can only send out Authentication
frames and unprotected SA Query Request frames, but there is
now place to add more frames and encryption with future commits.
2010-11-19 00:35:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
9dd7d6b09c WPS: Add special AP Setup Locked mode to allow read only ER
ap_setup_locked=2 can now be used to enable a special mode where
WPS ER can learn the current AP settings, but cannot change then.
In other words, the protocol is allowed to continue past M2, but
is stopped at M7 when AP is in this mode. WPS IE does not
advertise AP Setup Locked in this case to avoid interoperability
issues.

In wpa_supplicant, use ap_setup_locked=2 by default. Since the AP PIN
is disabled by default, this does not enable any new functionality
automatically. To allow the read-only ER to go through the protocol,
wps_ap_pin command needs to be used to enable the AP PIN.
2010-11-17 16:48:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e8ecb5fb49 Move wpa_cli readline integration into src/utils/edit_readline.c
All three line editing options are now located in src/utils/edit*.c
and provide the same API to allow easy build time selection.
2010-11-14 22:37:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bdc45634f0 wpa_cli: Use edit API as a wrapper for optional readline 2010-11-14 21:19:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
616e0e728e edit: Redraw input line on ^L 2010-11-14 21:03:24 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
82a855bda8 Move command line editing routines into src/utils/edit*.[ch]
This allows the same routines to be shared with other programs
since these are not really specific to wpa_cli.
2010-11-14 20:59:29 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f3b87561d7 Share WPA IE parser function for RSN authenticator/supplicant
There is no point in maintaining two almost identical versions
of this parser. Move WPA IE parser into wpa_common.c similarly
to what was already the case with RSN IE parse.
2010-11-12 21:52:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8ea3dd21d2 AP: Verify that HT40 secondary channel is supported
Refuse to enable HT40 mode AP unless both the primary and secondary
channels are enabled for AP use.
2010-11-12 18:31:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d8e66e80b9 Add HT40 flags into driver channel list
This can be used to figure out whether the driver would allow
HT40-/HT40+ on any specific channel.
2010-11-12 18:13:37 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bc8714283d WPS: Fix UPnP deinit order to avoid using freed memory
When multiple wireless interfaces are used with WPS, the UPnP
subscriptions need to be removed whenever a matching Registrar
instance gets removed. This avoids a segfault due to access to
freed memory during hostapd shutdown.

In addition, the UPnP interface instance structure needs to be
freed to avoid memory leak.
2010-11-11 16:56:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c17b1e274f WPS ER: Fix compiler warning on non-WPS2 builds 2010-11-11 14:54:18 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fd806bac5f WPS: Change concurrent radio AP to use only one WPS UPnP instance
WPS external Registrars can get confused about multiple UPnP
instances (one per radio) on a dual-concurrent APs. Simplify the
design by sharing a single UPnP state machine for all wireless
interfaces controlled by hostapd. This matches with the previous
changes that made a single command enable WPS functionality on
all interfaces.

This is relatively minimal change to address the sharing of the
state among multiple struct hostapd_data instances. More cleanup
can be done separately to remove unnecessary copies of information.
2010-11-11 14:50:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
91626c9fa7 P2P: Reselect operating channel preference based on best channels
When the peer does not include our initial preference in the Channel
List attribute during GO Negotiation, try to use the best channel of
the other band as the new preference instead of falling back to the
first channel in the intersection.
2010-11-10 13:34:33 +02:00
Anil Gathala Sudha
7cfc4ac319 P2P: Add support for automatic channel selection at GO
The driver wrapper may now indicate the preferred channel (e.g., based
on scan results) on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (and an overall best
frequency). When setting up a GO, this preference information is used
to select the operating channel if configuration does not include
hardcoded channel. Similarly, this information can be used during
GO Negotiation to indicate preference for a specific channel based
on current channel conditions.

p2p_group_add command can now use special values (freq=2 and freq=5)
to indicate that the GO is to be started on the specified band.
2010-11-10 13:33:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4d9f9ee7e5 wlantest: Parse Key Data KDEs and store GTK and IGTK 2010-11-09 20:29:12 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
c2aa25fb34 hostapd: Fix config reload for multi-BSS
Secondary BSS interfaces need to be activated after the config has
been reloaded.
2010-11-09 16:35:49 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
d3b4286967 Allow client isolation to be configured (ap_isolate=1)
Client isolation can be used to prevent low-level bridging of frames
between associated stations in the BSS. By default, this bridging is
allowed.
2010-11-09 16:27:15 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
5a5009dc92 Fix rate table handling
With the nl80211 driver, the rate table is mode dependent, so it
must be initialized after the hardware mode has been selected.
2010-11-09 16:17:50 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
d38ae2ea85 Add bridge handling for WDS STA interfaces
By default, add them to the configured bridge of the AP interface
(if present), but allow the user to specify a separate bridge.
2010-11-09 16:12:42 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
4a8c72959e nl80211: Fix AP VLAN handling for WDS STA reassociation
When a STA reassociates, the AP VLAN interface is still present,
do not attempt to create it in that case.
2010-11-09 16:03:05 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
7826ceae91 Fix WDS STA reassociation
If the STA entry is present in hostapd, but not in the kernel driver, its
WDS status needs to be restored when the STA reassociates
2010-11-09 16:00:09 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
3efb432952 driver_roboswitch: include net/if.h instead of linux/if.h
including linux/if.h clashes with other header files on some systems
2010-11-09 15:55:34 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
089da7c32b driver_madwifi: fix a compile error on big endian systems 2010-11-09 15:53:56 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
22a062815d WPS: Add wildcard AuthorizedMACs entry for PBC 2010-11-09 11:24:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
43882f1efc Allow TSN AP to be selected when configured for WEP
Commit d8d940b746 introduced a regression
that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was
rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use
WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e.,
whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow
the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or
IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA).

It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP
selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that
ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
2010-11-08 21:14:32 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a149fcc77d wlantest: Add preliminary version of IEEE 802.11 protocol testing tool
This tool can be used to capture IEEE 802.11 frames either from a
monitor interface for realtime capturing or from pcap files for
offline analysis. This version is only adding basic infrastructure for
going through the frames and parsing their headers.
2010-11-07 23:29:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6fc58a89e1 Fix EAP standalone server
Commit c3fc47ea8e fixed EAP passthrough
server to allow Logoff/Re-authentication to be used. However, it
broke EAP standalone server while doing that. Fix this by reverting
the earlier fix and by clearing the EAP Identity information in the
EAP server code whenever an EAPOL-Start or EAPOL-Logoff packet is
received.
2010-11-07 16:25:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
f44ae20783 P2P: Drop pending TX frame on new p2p_connect
We need to drop the pending frame to avoid issues with the new GO
Negotiation, e.g., when the pending frame was from a previous attempt at
starting a GO Negotiation.
2010-11-05 18:17:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7e3c178142 Remove unused TX queue parameters related to Beacon frames
These are not used by any driver wrapper, i.e., only the four
data queues (BK, BE, VI, VO) are configurable. Better remove these
so that there is no confusion about being able to configure
something additional.
2010-11-05 01:23:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ccb7e5ee59 WPS: Send WSC_NACK if message without Message Type is received 2010-11-04 18:17:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4a64a51b63 WPS: Share common function for building WSC ACK/NACK
These are identical functions in Enrollee and Registrar and there
is no need to maintain two copies of the same functionality.
2010-11-04 18:16:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7b23f0f3c8 WPS: Do not advertise support for WEP in WPS 2.0 build
There is no point in advertising support for WEP or Shared Key
authentication if we are going to reject those anyway based on
WPS 2.0 rules.
2010-11-04 17:37:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c7c0ddfd91 WPS: Remove PushButton from M1 ConfigMethods on AP
These config methods are for the Enrollee role, i.e., for adding
external Registrars, and as such, PushButton should not be claimed
to be supported.
2010-11-04 17:29:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6e1468839c nl80211: Allow libnl to be replaced with libnl-tiny
CONFIG_LIBNL_TINY=y can be used to select libnl-tiny instead of
libnl.
2010-11-04 17:14:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8dcb61ce5d WPS: Comment out WEP configuration lines on reconfig 2010-11-04 17:02:16 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
07fef399a1 WPS ER: Clear WPS state if PutMessage does not include NewOutMessage
This is needed to avoid getting stuck with pending WPS operation, e.g.,
when an AP replies to WSC_NACK with HTTP OK, but without following
message.
2010-11-02 11:20:54 +02:00
Helmut Schaa
65ae1afd44 nl80211: Pass data frames from unknown STAs to hostapd
Pass data frames from unknown STAs to hostapd in order to reply with
a Deauthentication or Disassociation frame. This fixes compliance
with IEEE Std 802.11-2007, 11.3.

Furthermore, this does not cause a lot of overhead (at least with
mac80211 drivers) since mac80211 does not pass all data frames (but
at least from unauthenticated and unassociated STAs) to cooked monitor
interfaces.

Tested with rt2800pci on a MIPS board.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2010-10-31 21:36:43 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d96e79f1e7 Make wpa_hexdump_buf{,-key} handle NULL buffer
This matches with behavior of other wpa_hexdump* functions.
2010-10-31 12:09:18 +02:00
Dmitry Shmidt
7a6a6374f2 Clear vars in drivers makefile
drivers.mak is shared between hostapd and wpa_supplicant and
compiling them together may create "wrong" flags.

Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
2010-10-31 11:59:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5245483f80 WPS ER: Add validation of WPS attributes in proxied Probe Request
When strict validation is enabled in the build, check the WPS
attributes in proxied Probe Request frames.
2010-10-31 11:57:13 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ea78c315a2 Add ctrl_interface event for association rejected 2010-10-27 20:28:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
59ddf221c8 Add BSSID to association rejected events 2010-10-27 20:27:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
10c4edde6e P2P: Do not re-send PD Request for join-a-group after acked frame
We are not actually interested in the PD Response in join-a-group
case, so there is no point in trying to send PD Request until the
response is received. This avoids an extra PD getting started after
a join-a-group operation in some cases.
2010-10-27 19:36:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c926593119 Allow EAPOL frames from pre-authenticating station to be processed 2010-10-27 11:34:29 +03:00
Shan Palanisamy
d143bdc862 atheros: Remove debug for ioctls that are not used anymore
This is needed to fix build with a newer driver version.
2010-10-27 11:33:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e11f5a2cbc hostapd: Set operstate UP when initializing AP mode
This is needed to avoid problems with other applications setting and
leaving the interface to IF_OPER_DORMANT state. In AP mode, the interface
is ready immediately after the keys are set, so we better make sure the
DORMANT state does not prevent normal operations after that.
2010-10-26 16:30:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4e0c025d13 P2P: Fix parsing of UTF-8 device names
The control character verification was supposed to only replace
bytes 0..31, not 0..31 and 128..255 as happened on systems where
char is signed.
2010-10-26 10:40:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
be88391dee WPS ER: Cache AP settings for APs that restart UPnP
This is needed to avoid issues with APs that restart their UPnP,
e.g., when ER reconfigures them. The previously known settings are
now cached and taken into use if an AP is detected to leave
(ssdp:byebye) and then return.
2010-10-25 22:22:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ed159ad41b WPS ER: Add more details to wps_er_pbc failure returns
Indicate the reason for the failure when wps_er_pbc is rejected.
2010-10-25 21:59:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
669f322d0e WPS ER: Fix SetSelectedRegistrar to include wildcard AuthorizedMACs
This is required by WPS 2.0, so add the wildcard address to
AuthorizedMACs if no addresses are in the list.
2010-10-25 21:45:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
20ebd9c4b9 WPS ER: Only activate PBC mode on single AP
Verify that the UUID given to wps_er_pbc command is known and only
activate PBC mode on the matching AP. The UUID can be that of the
AP or the station/Enrollee.
2010-10-25 21:41:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3e7533b399 WPS ER: Show SetSelectedRegistrar events as ctrl_iface events
This makes it easier to figure out if something goes wrong in
preparing the AP for enrolling a station.
2010-10-25 21:29:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c973f3868a P2P: Remove P2P group on driver resource becoming unavailable
Add a new driver event, EVENT_INTERFACE_UNAVAILABLE, for indicating
that the driver is not able to continue operating the virtual
interface in its current mode anymore, e.g., due to operating
channel for GO interface forced to a DFS channel by another virtual
interface.

When this happens for a P2P group interface, the P2P group will
be terminated and P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event shows the reason for
this as follows:
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan0 GO reason=UNAVAILABLE
2010-10-25 19:16:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3071e18109 P2P: Add mechanism for timing out idle groups
A new configuration parameter, p2p_group_idle, can now be used to set
idle timeout value for P2P groups in seconds (0 = no timeout). If set,
this values is used to remove P2P group (both GO and P2P client)
interfaces after the group has been idle (no clients/GO seen) for the
configuration duration.

The P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event is now indicating the reason for group
removal when known. For example:
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan0 GO reason=REQUESTED
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan1 client reason=IDLE
2010-10-25 18:24:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1f4c7b6b2a hostapd: Fix compiler warning
Commit 83e843e830 copied a workaround
without updating the return value to match with the void function.
2010-10-25 13:38:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
83e843e830 hostapd: Avoid crashing on station mode disassoc event
Some driver wrappers may end up indicating a disassociation or
deauthentication event without the address of the station, e.g.,
based on a previous non-AP mode event. Avoid crashing hostapd
by verifying that the require address parameter is available in
the event before processing it.
2010-10-22 17:43:23 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
450eddcfae hostapd: Add wps_config ctrl_interface command for configuring AP
This command can be used to configure the AP using the internal
WPS registrar. It works in the same way as new AP settings received
from an ER.
2010-10-21 16:49:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7374b68ee9 P2P: Fix p2p_send_action conversions
Couple of these missed the change in the first argument and resulted
in various crashes.
2010-10-20 21:32:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3f9285ff19 P2P: Delay send_action call if p2p_scan is in progress
In order to avoid confusing the driver with a new remain-on-channel
request, delay sending of a new Action frame if the driver indicates
Action frame RX diromg a scan.
2010-10-20 19:44:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0b8889d8e5 P2P: Do not stop Listen state if it is on correct channel
This is needed to optimize response to GO Negotiation Request frames.
The extra remain-on-channel cancel followed by new remain-on-channel for
the same channel takes too much time with some driver/firmware
designs for the response to go out quickly enough to avoid peer
timing out while waiting for our response.
2010-10-20 19:44:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ef10f4733f WPS ER: Add wps_er_set_config to use local configuration
This command can be used to enroll a network based on a local
network configuration block instead of having to (re-)learn the
current AP settings with wps_er_learn.
2010-10-20 13:37:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cbbf4a1cc3 WPS: Fix a compiler warning in hostapd_wps_update_ie() 2010-10-20 13:35:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2c8a4eef41 WPS: Update Beacon/ProbeResp IE on wps_version_number changes
This test command is supposed to change the WPS version number in all
places immediately, so make sure that the IEs used in management
frames get updated immediately.
2010-10-19 19:57:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3f4ce13fde P2P: Track non-P2P members in the group and set Group Limit bit
The P2P group component is now tracking of associated stations
in the group and the Group Limit bit in the Group Capabilities
is updated based on whether there is room for new clients in
the group.
2010-10-19 18:10:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
93b7ddd032 P2P: Skip GO Neg Conf ack failure workaround of send failures
The workaround to ignore no ctrl::ack received for GO Negotiation
Confirmation frame was only supposed to be used when the frame was
actually transmitted and just the ack was not received. However, due
to the way the driver failure on transmitting the frame were reported,
this ended up getting applied for all failures in sending the GO
Negotiation Confirmation frame.

Improve this by providing a mechanism to indicate whether send_action
operations fail locally before the frame was actually transmitted or
because of not receiving ack frame after having transmitted the frame.
2010-10-19 12:47:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2b67a67144 WPS UPnP: Add more debug for event subscription 2010-10-19 12:43:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
99ba7f889b WPS: Do not drop subscriptions based on max queue length
UPnP event subscriptions are not supposed to be dropped based on
whether events can be delivered quickly enough. Leave dropping to
happen only based on failed deliveries to avoid issues with a burst
of events kicking out still active subscribers.
2010-10-17 21:36:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f30e698c08 WPS UPnP: Add more priority for queuing EAP events 2010-10-17 21:30:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
08a98b6544 WPS UPnP: Throttle WLANEvent notifications to 5 per second
Do not send more than five Probe Request WLANEvent notifications
per second. Even though the limit should in theory apply to all
WLANEvents, it is better not to drop EAP notifications because
of Probe Request frames and really, the only real reason for
event bursts is Probe Request frames.
2010-10-17 21:24:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3904567d0b WPS: Limit Probe Request event queuing if subscriber may have left
Instead of queuing all events for a subscriber, only queue more
important events if delivery of event notifications starts failing.
This allows more time for the subscriber to recover since the maximum
queue length if not reached because of Probe Request frames only.
2010-10-17 20:58:58 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d1e17fbc9c WPS: Schedule sending of pending events after failure
There is no point leaving these pending events waiting for something
new to trigger us to continue.
2010-10-17 20:57:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8c3a2f11ab WPS: Separate local error from max queue length reached
Drop subscription only if the max queue length has been reached;
not based on any error.
2010-10-17 20:29:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
dd50c2d425 WPS UPnP: Improved event notification failure processing
Instead of dropping the subscription on first failure, allow up to
10 failures before dropping. In addition, drop the callback URLs
one by one instead of full subscription if only one URL is failing.
2010-10-17 20:26:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
10fb1a984f WPS: Convert assert() to error return 2010-10-17 20:23:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1f1d4df09a WPS UPnP: Fix memory leak on retry case
The event entry needs to be freed when giving up on retries.
2010-10-17 20:22:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3953627b35 WPS: Add more debug info for UPnP operations 2010-10-17 20:20:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ed31b5ebcf WPS: Remove unused define
This timeout value was moved to now separate HTTP client implementation.
2010-10-17 20:15:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
75c3fc2e8a WPS: Cleaned up URL parser not to modify const buffer
There is no need to use '\0' termination here in string parsing,
so we may as well clean this up to follow the const declaration.
2010-10-17 20:12:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
75779589e8 WPS: Drop subscription if it does not have any valid callback address 2010-10-17 20:11:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d0ebf3285f WPS: Remove unused error path code 2010-10-17 20:10:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
acd0ef4d3c WPS UPnP: Fix HTTP client timeout event code
The define here was overriding the event code enum value and that
resulted in incorrect code being used and WPS UPnP code ignoring the
timeout events.
2010-10-17 20:07:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0e8da74e22 Fix build with drivers that use driver_wext.c
If CONFIG_DRIVER_WEXT=y is not used in .config, but driver_wext.c
gets pull in to help another driver wrapper, rfkill code needs to
included to fix the build.
2010-10-15 22:11:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
33c5deb816 nl80211: Indicate channel list change events
Listen to regulatory event messages from kernel and convert them to
internal driver event notifications indicated that the channel list
may have changed.
2010-10-15 18:56:36 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b5c9da8db3 P2P: Add mechanism for updating P2P channel list based on driver events
This allows P2P channel list to be updated whenever the driver changes
its list of allowed channels, e.g., based on country code from scan
results.
2010-10-15 18:55:22 +03:00
Anil Gathala Sudha
a0dee79709 P2P: Send AP mode WPS-FAIL event to parent interface
The AP operation with wpa_supplicant requires an additional callback
to get the needed event information from hostapd side so that
wpa_msg() can be called for wpa_s->parent if needed.
2010-10-14 20:57:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fc215bfe86 WPS: Add WPS-FAIL ctrl_interface event for hostapd 2010-10-14 20:50:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
81611b95ff WPS: Add Config Error into WPS-FAIL events
This makes it easier to figure out what could have failed in the
WPS protocol and potentially provide more information for the
user on how to resolve the issue.
2010-10-14 20:49:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d054a4622c P2P: Reject multi-channel concurrent operations depending on driver
The driver wrapper can now indicate whether the driver supports
concurrent operations on multiple channels (e.g., infra STA connection
on 5 GHz channel 36 and P2P group on 2.4 GHz channel 1). If not,
P2P_CONNECT commands will be rejected if they would require
multi-channel concurrency.

The new failure codes for P2P_CONNECT:

FAIL-CHANNEL-UNAVAILABLE:
The requested/needed channel is not currently available (i.e., user has
an option of disconnecting another interface to make the channel
available).

FAIL-CHANNEL-UNSUPPORTED:
The request channel is not available for P2P.
2010-10-14 14:24:56 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7861cb08c9 P2P: Share code for p2p_connect/authorize channel preparation 2010-10-14 12:45:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1e19f73495 P2P: Verify that p2p_connect forced frequency is allowed for P2P
Do not accept forced frequency unless the specified channel is
allowed for P2P, i.e., is included in the local list of
advertised channels.
2010-10-14 12:42:17 +03:00
Paul Stewart
7ee35bf395 nl80211: Add more details into signal change events
Add new survey retrieval function and add txrate to station into the
EVENT_SIGNAL_CHANGE events.
2010-10-12 20:01:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
68d6fe5693 WPS: Workaround broken Credential encoding from some D-Link APs
At least D-Link DIR-600 and DIR-825 have been reported to include
an extra octet after the Network Key attribute within a Credential
attribute. This can happen at least when they are provisioning an
open network.

Add a workaround to detect this incorrectly encoded attribute and
to skip the extra octet when parsing such a Credential.
2010-10-11 16:07:49 +03:00
Johannes Berg
5582a5d1b3 nl80211: Use nl80211 for Probe Request/Response frames
The new nl80211 API means we don't need to use monitor interfaces. This
means that the P2P implementation now requires a kernel that has support
for generic management frame (not just Action frame) transmission.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 18:10:37 +03:00
Johannes Berg
9884f9cc1c nl80211: Refactor Action frame TX
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 18:00:25 +03:00
Johannes Berg
bd94971e11 nl80211: Use new frame registration API
This is backward compatible since older kernels will ignore the extra
attribute and only allow registration for Action frames.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 17:55:18 +03:00
Johannes Berg
6ee04cfcf4 nl80211: support intra-BSS configuration
Using the AP_ISOLATE nl80211 option, we can support intra-BSS
distribution configuration.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 17:48:54 +03:00
Johannes Berg
a65a9aed7e nl80211: work around libnl bug
libnl has a bug, when binding more than two sockets and releasing one,
it will release the wrong address and then try to reuse it, which fails.
Therefore, we need to reimplement the socket address assignment logic
locally for libnl 1.1.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-10-10 17:47:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4e698e5c30 WPS: Fix WPS commands in wpa_supplicant AP mode
Commit 9290cc1800 broke this by moving
to use for_each_interface() which is not available in wpa_supplicant
AP mode.
2010-10-10 17:43:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ca0d6b81d6 P2P: Fix a typo to fix CONFIG_P2P=y build
Previous typo fix was missed here.
2010-10-10 17:28:47 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
257a515295 nl80211: Sync with wireless-testing.git 2010-10-09 11:57:05 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c3fc47ea8e EAP server: Allow reauth to be started with passthrough
Some sequencies of EAPOL logoff/logon/start messages seem to be
able to get the previous implementation into state where hostapd
would not be able to start reauthentication when external
authentication server is used. The EAP server code would bypass
the initial Identity Request generation and EAPOL code would not
be able to send anything to the authentication server or supplicant
at that point. Work around this by forcing EAP server code to
start with Identity Request after INITIALIZE state even if the
Identity is known.
2010-10-09 08:53:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
dce044cce5 P2P: Extend P2P manager functionality to work with driver MLME
Add P2P IE into Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Request
frames for drivers that generate this frames internally.
2010-10-08 18:16:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b74c19faf5 P2P: Fix a typo in P2P manager definition 2010-10-08 18:15:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2f7d9f2dd9 Apply WPS configuration changes to all interfaces that use WPS
When a single hostapd process is controlling multiple interfaces,
apply the received or auto-generated configuration changes to all
interfaces that have enabled WPS.
2010-10-08 17:32:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e55f98f4b8 Disable AP PIN on all interfaces controlled by the same process
When a single hostapd process is used to manage multiple interfaces,
disable AP PIN on all interfaces if an attack is detected on any
interface.
2010-10-08 17:24:58 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9290cc1800 Apply hostapd WPS commands to all interfaces on concurrent APs
When the same hostapd process is controlling multiple interfaces,
apply WPS commands (push button, add PIN, change AP PIN) to all
interfaces that are configured to use WPS.
2010-10-08 17:15:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bf0ed63f3f Allow a postfix to be defined for the version number
A separate build number (etc.) version number postfix can now be
added to the build without having to modify source code files by
defining VERSION_STR_POSTFIX. This can be done, e.g., by adding
following line to .config:

CFLAGS += -DVERSION_STR_POSTFIX=\"-foo\"
2010-10-07 10:51:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0314e26a61 Fix wpa_supplicant AP mode with WPS not to crash
Commit 3379a3a795 added a direct
iface->for_each_interface use without verification whether the
function is available. This works with hostapd, but not
wpa_supplicant (which crashes on segfault).
2010-10-06 16:46:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
416192628d Fix AP mode 40 MHz pri/sec channel parsing in overlap determination
The previous implementation ended up incorrectly assuming that all
40 MHz use cases have secondary channel above the primary one. Fix this
by properly masking the secondary channel offset field and checking its
value.
2010-10-06 14:09:44 +03:00
David A Benjamin
32f4e7b124 wext: Fix scan result signal levels when driver reports in dBm
wpa_supplicant showed signal levels incorrectly with some drivers:
Jun  6 16:29:36 rupert wpa_supplicant[18945]: Current BSS: 00:0d:97:11:40:d6
level=190
Jun  6 16:29:36 rupert wpa_supplicant[18945]: Selected BSS: 00:0d:97:11:50:09
level=192

Judging from output from other tools (iwlist) and the min_diff block
at the end of wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam, it seems these values
should actually be negative. Specifically, if one treats that number
as a signed char instead of unsigned, everything matches up.

To be honest, I've little to no understanding of wireless, but looking
at the source code for wireless-tools (iw_print_stats in iwlib.c), it
seems that the fields of the iw_quality struct need to be decoded
differently depending on various flags. I guess
src/drivers/driver_wext.c should have similar logic in
wext_get_scan_qual.

I wrote a patch that attempts to replicate some of that logic,
although it may be more complicated than is necessary; I think some of
the complexity is for backwards-compatibility, which might not be
necessary depending on wpa_supplicant's dependencies? In any case, it
is attached. Again, I don't know how any of this works, so it's likely
the patch is a bit off. But I think at least the logic to determine
min_diff in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam would be more accurate if
level were determined correctly.
2010-10-04 08:25:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8602b0f213 nl80211: Include linux/rtnetlink.h explicitly
This is needed with libnl-tiny to get various definitions that
get included implicitly with libnl.
2010-09-29 21:52:51 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
7598389afe nl80211: Sync the header file with wireless-testing.git 2010-09-29 21:39:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
12970f8a57 atheros: Prefer WSC IE in (Re)Association Request frame
This is needed to work properly with WPS stations that may include
both WPA/RSN IE and WSC IE when associating for WPS provisioning.
2010-09-24 17:01:03 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6d1031b971 WPS ER: Add more debug info on initialization errors 2010-09-24 16:05:58 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a9d69254e3 WPS ER: Make sure PIN timeout does not interrupt PBC operation
We need to clear the selected registrar timeout from wps_er_learn
when stopping the protocol run at M7 (previously, this was done only
when WSC_Done was being processed). In addition, we need to cancel
the timeout when a new PBC operation is started.
2010-09-23 14:45:55 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
fa37511fa7 WPS: Fix hostapd reconfig to update WPS UPnP string pointers
This is needed to update the pointers maintained within WPS code
to use the new configuration data instead of maintaining pointers
to the old configuration which will be freed. This fixes strings in
UPnP discovery after reconfig (they used to be random freed memory..).
2010-09-22 19:34:32 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
7d698c4ec7 WPS: Add more debug details for Credential building 2010-09-22 19:20:01 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2d5e0d78e9 WPS ER: Fix debug message for protocol run done case
This is not a failure and should not be indicated as such in the
debug log.
2010-09-22 19:19:33 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3237bfb1a3 WPS: Fix strict validation of encrypted data for WSC 2.0-only case
Need to figure out whether the message is from a WSC 2.0 -based
device based on the unencrypted attributes, not the contents of the
encrypted data since the Version2 subelement is only included in the
unencrypted area.
2010-09-22 19:17:13 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
70153d385c hostapd: Add virt/phy flag for Display/PushButton if needed (WPS 2.0)
This seems to be the easiest way of making sure the Config Methods
value is compliant with the WSC 2.0 specification without having
to modify the configuration file. However, this will only add the
virtual flag, so the configuration files should really be updated
to specify values that match the AP design.
2010-09-22 17:45:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
370cb2a9ce WPS: Making some parsing messages use excessive debug level
This makes it easier to read -dd debug logs in environments that
have multiple WPS or P2P devices.
2010-09-22 11:39:58 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
82fb18472e WPS: Fix strict validation of (Re)Association Response
This frame is supposed to include Response Type, not Request Type
attribute.
2010-09-22 11:13:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
0e2e565a44 WPS 2.0: Provide (Re)Association Response WPS IE to driver
WPS 2.0 mandates the AP to include WPS IE in (Re)Association Response
if the matching (Re)Association Request included WPS IE. Provide the
needed WPS IE information to the driver_ops API for drivers that
process association frames internally.

Note: This modifies the driver_ops API by adding a new argument to
set_ap_wps_ie().
2010-09-22 10:46:44 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
baf7081ccd WPS: Add MAC address to validation error message for Probe Request
This makes it easier to figure out which device is sending invalid
Probe Request frames.
2010-09-22 10:07:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b4e34f2fdf WPS: Make testing operations configurable at runtime
Instead of build time options (CONFIG_WPS_TESTING_EXTRA_CRED and
CONFIG_WPS_EXTENSIBILITY_TESTING), use a single build option
(CONFIG_WPS_TESTING) and runtime configuration of which testing
operations are enabled. This allows a single binary to be used
for various tests.

The runtime configuration can be done through control interface
with wpa_cli/hostapd_cli commands:
Enable extensibility tests:
set wps_version_number 0x57
Disable extensibility tests (WPS2 build):
set wps_version_number 0x20
Enable extra credential tests:
set wps_testing_dummy_cred 1
Disable extra credential tests:
set wps_testing_dummy_cred 0
2010-09-21 19:51:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ab98525399 WPS 2.0: Fix AuthorizedMACs check to accept wildcard address
We need to accept both our own address and the ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
as an indication of the AP having authorized us.
2010-09-21 19:36:44 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
252d7db297 P2P: Fill in default Config Methods in Invitation Request
If the peer is not authorized for GO Negotiation, wps_method is not
actually set. In that case, it is better to fill in our default
config methods rather than end up leaving the field to be zero.
2010-09-21 18:26:01 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3379a3a795 WPS: Fix Beacon WPS IE on concurrent dualband AP in PBC mode
The Beacon frame must include UUID-E and RF Bands attributes when
in active PBC mode to allow stations to figure out that two BSSes in
PBC mode is not a PBC session overlap.
2010-09-20 15:32:29 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ff28ccafd5 WPS: Add BSSID to strict validation error messages
This makes it easier to figure out which AP is sending invalid
Beacon or Probe Response frames.
2010-09-20 14:54:22 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e0369e3664 WPS: Use same UUID in multi-interface case
When generating the UUID based on MAC address, share the same UUID
with all interfaces. This fixes a potential issue with concurrent
dualband APs where the UUID needs to be same for PBC to work properly.
2010-09-20 14:28:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e64e3d245e WPS: Fix CONFIG_WPS_OOB build
The Version2 attribute was previous changed to a subelement and
the OOB code was missed during the change.
2010-09-19 17:18:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3d32c6517d EAP-pwd: Fix couple of memory leaks 2010-09-14 22:16:17 -10:00
Jouni Malinen
d52be1db76 EAP-pwd: Move bnctx into per-protocol instance structure
This avoids double frees of bnctx and related crashes.
2010-09-14 22:04:09 -10:00
Dan Harkins
df684d82ff EAP-pwd: Add support for EAP-pwd server and peer functionality
This adds an initial EAP-pwd (RFC 5931) implementation. For now,
this requires OpenSSL.
2010-09-14 21:51:40 -10:00
Sudhakar Swaminathan
0f66abd25b P2P: Add option for disabling intra BSS distribution
p2p_intra_bss configuration parameter can now be used to
disable/enable intra BSS distribution (bridging of frames between
the clients in a group).
2010-09-10 10:30:26 -07:00
Ardong Chen
2049af2bd5 P2P: Fix invitation_received callback to use NULL bssid (if not known)
Previously, the storage buffer for the Group BSSID was returned
regardless of whether it was included in the invitation or not.
2010-09-10 10:30:26 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e2197af1b2 P2P: Make sure parsed Device Name gets null terminated
If the msg->device_name buffer is filled from two different sources,
the copy from the P2P Device Info attribute needs to make sure that
the values gets null terminated to match the length of the correct
string should the other place use another string (which is not really
allowed by the spec, but could happen).
2010-09-10 10:30:26 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ae3e342108 P2P: Add peer timeout into group formation 15 second timeout
This adds some more time for WPS provisioning step in case the peer
takes long time to start group interface operations.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Ardong Chen
2f9929ffcc WPS: Allow pending WPS operation to be cancelled
A new ctrl_interface command, WPS_CANCEL, can now be used to cancel
a pending or ongoing WPS operation. For now, this is only available
with wpa_supplicant (either in station or AP mode). Similar
functionality should be added for hostapd, too.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
fbe7027239 P2P: Provide local event on GO Neg Req rejection
If an authorized (p2p_connect used locally) GO Negotiation is
rejected when receiving GO Negotiation Request from the peer,
indicate the failure with a ctrl_interface P2P-GO-NEG-FAILURE
event. Previously, this event was only shown on the peer (i.e.,
the device receiving the GO Negotiation Response with non-zero
Status code).
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Ardong Chen
ffe98dfb88 P2P: Process Invitation Request from previously unknown peer
Since this message now includes P2P Device Info attribute, it is
reasonable to learn the peer data and process the message instead of
rejecting the message.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Ardong Chen
17bef1e97a P2P: Add peer entry based on Provision Discovery Request
Add (or complete Probe Request only) P2P peer entry when receiving
Provision Discovery Request from a previously unknown peer. This is
especially of use for a GO when a P2P client is requesting to join
a running group.
2010-09-10 10:30:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
812bf56ab1 Fix build without CONFIG_P2P=y 2010-09-09 07:20:28 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e9a7ae41fa P2P: Use SSID from GO Negotiation to limit WPS provisioning step
In order to avoid picking incorrect SSID from old scan results, use
SSID from GO Negotiation to select the AP.
2010-09-09 07:17:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f8d0131a11 P2P: Use operating frequency from peer table as backup for join
The scan operation before Provision Discovery Request may not include
the GO. However, we are likely to have the GO in our P2P peer table,
so use that information to figure out the operating channel if BSS
table entry is not available.
2010-09-09 07:17:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f7a6905735 P2P: Add a workaround for Extended Listen Timing getting stuck
This should not really happen, but it looks like the Listen command
may fail is something else (e.g., a scan) was running at an
inconvenient time. As a workaround, allow new Extended Listen
operation to be started if this state is detected.
2010-09-09 07:17:23 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6125c661d5 P2P: Fix cross connection allowed parser to use correct field
The previous version had a bug that could result in NULL pointer
dereference if the P2P IE included Manageability attribute, but no
Capability attribute.
2010-09-09 07:17:22 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5548ddc217 P2P: Allow P2P IE without Device Info in (Re)Assoc Req
This can happen, e.g., when a P2P client connects to a P2P group
using the infrastructure WLAN interface instead of P2P group
interface. In that case, the P2P client may behave as if the GO
would be a P2P Manager WLAN AP.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b6c79a998f Add test command for disabling/enabling A-MPDU aggregation
ctrl_iface command "SET ampdu <0/1>" can now be used to
disable/enable A-MPDU aggregation.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
0cc8be3e45 P2P: Fix code order to avoid potential NULL pointer dereference 2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c4ea4c5c90 P2P: Allow driver wrapper to indicate how many stations are supported
This can be used to limit the number of clients allowed to connect
to the group on the GO.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
eea2fd9eff P2P: Add mechanism for configuring UAPSD parameters for group
This is needed to be able to change parameters for dynamically
created interfaces between the creation of the interface and
association/start AP commands.

Following ctrl_interface commands can now be used:

P2P_SET client_apsd disable
- disable configuration (i.e., use driver default) in client mode

P2P_SET client_apsd <BE>,<BK>,<VI>,<VO>;<max SP Length>
- enable UASPD with specific trigger configuration (0/1) per AC
  (max SP Length is currently ignored)

P2P_SET go_apsd disable
- disable configuration (i.e., use driver default) in AP mode

P2P_SET go_apsd <0/1>
- disable/enable APSD in AP mode
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2f837b41dc P2P: Fix build after WSC 2.0 change to use WFA vendor extension 2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2d509b39b1 WPS: Fix ER PBC overlap detection build with P2P changes 2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5ded7d3eb8 P2P: Fix GAS fragmentation to match with IEEE 802.11u
P2P specification v1.15 fixed the description of the GAS fragmentation
to not duplicate NQP Query Response Field header in all fragments. This
change makes the fragmentation match with the description in IEEE
802.11u. The change is not backwards compatible with previous P2P
specification versions as far as fragmented SD responses are concerned.
2010-09-09 07:17:21 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3dfda83d9c P2P: Add Device Password ID to GO Neg Request RX event
This event indicates the Device Password ID that the peer tried
to use in GO Negotiation. For example:
P2P-GO-NEG-REQUEST 02:40:61:c2:f3:b7 dev_passwd_id=4
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4147a2cc64 P2P: Fix p2p_connect join with interface address
Need to fetch P2P Device Address from the peers table in case the
p2p_connect join command uses interface address.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
72044390f3 P2P: Add support for cross connection
If enabled, cross connection allows GO to forward IPv4 packets
using masquerading NAT from the P2P clients in the group to an
uplink WLAN connection. This is disabled by default and can be
enabled with "wpa_cli p2p_set cross_connect 1" on the P2P device
interface.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6c6915f3db P2P: Add defined values for P2P Manageability Bitmap 2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
0af196088c P2P: Fix device discoverability to not wait before sending GO Neg Req
When we receive Device Discoverability Response, we need to initiate
new GO Negotiation as quickly as possible to avoid the target client
from going back to sleep. Make sure we do not end up in
P2P_CONNECT_LISTEN state (short Listen mode) in this case.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
aefb53bd5d P2P: Disable periodic NoA when non-P2P STA is connected
For now, this applies to the test command that can be used to set
periodic NoA (p2p_set noa). The value are stored and periodic NoA
is enabled whenever there are no non-P2P STAs connected to the GO.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4c08c0bd57 P2P: Include P2P IE in (Re)AssocReq to infra AP if it uses P2P IE
While this is not strictly speaking required by the P2P specification
for a not-P2P Managed Device, this can provide useful information for
the P2P manager AP and may be needed to pass certification tests.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5be5305b7e P2P: Include Extended Listen Timing attribute in (Re)AssocReq
If extended listen timing is enabled, it should be advertised in
(Re)Association Request frames sent to GOs.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
04d8dad5c7 P2P: Wait on operating channel between invitation requests
If running in active GO mode to invite a device to join the group,
wait on operating channel instead of listen channel.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
d9d6a58c8f P2P: Fix invitation to active group to use correct operating channel
Invitation Request must use the current operating frequency of the
group, not the default operating channel.
2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
48e4377093 P2P: Fix WSC IE not to include two Device Name attrs with WPS 2.0 is used 2010-09-09 07:17:20 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
d5b20a73b2 P2P: Fix channel forcing for p2p_connect auth 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
18eff3a3a7 P2P: Use 0-timeout when inviting to running group as client 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
952f119242 P2P: Add Device Info attribute to Invitation Request
This was added as a mandatory attribute in one of the recent spec
updates.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
55a625799f P2P: Add Group Info attr into Probe Response in GO without clients
While there is no real value in this, the spec seems to mark this
attribute as mandatory from GO, so better included it regardless
of whether we have clients or not (the attribute is empty in case
no clients are connected).
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
80c9582a5f P2P: Add test command for filtering which peers are discovered
"wpa_cli p2p_set peer_filter <MAC address>" can now be used to
only allow a single P2P Device (based on P2P Device Address) to be
discovered for testing. Setting the address to 00:00:00:00:00:00
disables the filter.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9e00ea1aa3 P2P: Fix country string mismatch validation off-by-one offset
0x04 was being checked from incorrect location when skipping country
code validation.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
18708aadfc P2P: Initial support for SD fragmentation (GAS Comeback Request/Response) 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
bf608cad56 P2P: Rename SD info not available define to match with spec change 2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3c5126a41f P2P: Set Device Password ID in WPS M1/M2 per new rules
If the P2P client (WPS Enrollee) uses a PIN from the GO (Registrar),
Device Password ID in M1 & M2 is set to Registrar-specified.
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c381508d88 P2P: Implement power save configuration
wpa_cli p2p_set ps <0/1/2>
wpa_cli p2p_set oppps <0/1>
wpa_cli p2p_set ctwindow <0..> msec
2010-09-09 07:17:19 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
40c03fd40b P2P: Handle p2p_scan tracking in SEARCH state
Previously, only the initial p2p_scan was used to delay starting new
P2P operations. However, this should have applied to the SEARCH state
scans, too.
2010-09-09 07:17:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
962473c136 P2P: Add preliminary P2P Manager AP support for hostapd 2010-09-09 07:17:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ef7963917c P2P: Add group notification from (re)association request 2010-09-09 07:17:18 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f684e608af P2P: Use PSK format in WPS Credential 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
8ccbe415ba P2P: Add group notifications 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e44f8bf20a P2P: Add P2P configuration and callbacks in hostapd code 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b22128efdc P2P: Add initial version of P2P Module 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c2af2afb3b P2P: Preparations for adding P2P IE into Beacon/Probe Response frames 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b305c684b8 P2P: Save a copy of P2P IE(s) data from (Re)Association Request 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
046b26a24e nl80211: Add P2P operations 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2883205ec8 driver_test: Add functionality for allowing P2P testing 2010-09-09 07:17:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
75bde05d53 P2P: Add driver operations for P2P use 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
62281bc690 P2P: Do no process Probe Request with P2P wildcard SSID in WPS
The Probe Request frames used in P2P Device Discovery should not be
processed by the WPS implementation.
2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
935a948f97 P2P: Enable use of WPS Requested Device Type without WPS 2.0 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
63675def6e P2P: Add Device Name into WPS IE in Probe Request frames 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
91a9464528 Make IEEE 802.11 IE parser aware of P2P IE
This does not handle fragmented IEs and is only used to check quickly
whether the IE blob includes any P2P IE(s).
2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
dd6cc5a20c P2P: Wi-Fi Direct frame format definitions 2010-09-09 07:17:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
fdc9eeb175 WPS 2.0: Convert new attributes into WFA vendor extension
The WSC 2.0 specification moved to use another design for the new
attributes to avoid backwards compatibility issues with some
deployed implementations.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ac4dcaf7bf WPS 2.0: Fix strict mode validation of UPnP MAC Address format
This was supposed to only reject the message from WPS 2.0 ER, not from
WPS 1.0 ER.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
42f50264c0 WPS: Make fragment size configurable for EAP-WSC peer
"wpa_cli set wps_fragment_size <val>" can now be used to configure the
fragment size limit for EAP-WSC.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ecece754db WPS: Add more debug prints for authorized MACs operations 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
498cdee0c7 WPS ER: Use PBC overlap detection
ER should follow same rules as internal Registrar in an AP for
session overlap detection.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6a4477236e WPS 2.0: Only reject Probe Request frames from WPS 2.0 devices 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e69b86b71d WPS 2.0: By default, use strict validation reject only with WPS 2.0 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5fabd9fefb WPS: Fix strict validation to mandate Network Index attribute
While this attribute is is now deprecated, it is still required
for backwards compatibility. Better check this if strict validation
is enabled.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e6e25d37a3 WPS 2.0: Use strict validation of NewWLANEventMAC only with WPS 2.0
This avoids some testing issues with WPS 1.0 implementations while
maintaining strict validation for WPS 2.0 implementations.
2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b68ccf4048 WPS ER: Do not use SetSelectedRegistrar when learning/configuring AP 2010-09-09 06:07:49 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ad4741183f WPS 2.0: Make sure PHY/VIRT flag gets set for PBC 2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
168f840169 WPS 2.0: Add strict validation of SetSelectedRegistrar attributes 2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
545ee4fd3d WPS 2.0: Add wildcard AuthorizedMACs if Enrollee address is not known 2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
53587ec183 WPS 2.0: Make WSC 2.0 support to be build option (CONFIG_WPS2)
For now, the default build will only include WSC 1.0 support.
CONFIG_WPS2=y can be used to add support for WSC 2.0.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c15a854aec WPS 2.0: Add tool for testing protocol extensibility
This is disabled by default and can be enabled by defining
CONFIG_WPS_EXTENSIBILITY_TESTING.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4a34969824 WPS: Add a test mechanism for adding an extra credential into M8
This can be used to build a test version of ER that adds an extra
Credential attribute into M8.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
54f489be45 WPS 2.0: Validate WPS attributes in management frames and WSC messages
If CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is set, validate WPS IE(s) in management frames and
reject the frames if any of the mandatory attributes is missing or if an
included attribute uses an invalid value. In addition, verify that all
mandatory attributes are included and have valid values in the WSC
messages.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
00ae50bc87 atheros: Use larger buffer for WSC IE changes
This resolves issues in updating Beacon/Probe Response frame IEs
in a case where the value may be long enough to get fragmented
into multiple IEs.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ed1c1ebfb4 WPS 2.0: Ignore WEP Credentials as station Enrollee
Ignore Credential if it is for a WEP network. Reject the message if
no valid Credential is found.
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6be2d7f826 WPS 2.0: Enforce new security policy of received AP Settings
When receiving new AP Settings from ER, reject WEP configuration
and upgrade WPA-Personal/TKIP only to mixed mode (i.e., add
WPA2-Personal/CCMP).
2010-09-09 06:07:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6b633b4da7 WPS 2.0: Fix Probe Request WPS IE building to be able to fragment data
If all the device information attributes use their maximum lengths,
a single WPS IE is not enough to fit in all the data and as such,
we must be able to fragment the data. In addition, the wpabuf needs
to be allocated larger to fit in maximum data.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
dcc4d8be75 WPS 2.0: Disable WPS workarounds if CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is defined 2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
5314d652d4 WPS 2.0: Modify empty-string workaround to meet 2.0 rules
Instead of using 0x00 as the extra character, use space (' ') to
avoid failing tests that verify that the variable length string
attributes are not null terminated. In addition, this workaround
can now be disabled by defining CONFIG_WPS_STRICT for the build.
This can be done by adding following line to .config:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_WPS_STRICT

However, it should be noted that such a build may not interoperate
with some deployed WPS 1.0 -based implementations and as such, is
mainly designed for testing.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
6a857074f4 WPS 2.0: Add virtual/physical display and pushbutton config methods 2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
662bd57522 WPS 2.0: Add device attributes into Probe Request
Add Manufacturer, Model Name, Model Number, and Device Name attributes
into the WSC IE in the Probe Request frames.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
cfe1c3f1ef WPS 2.0: Add Request to Enroll attribute into Probe Request
Whenever wpa_supplication is using Request Type Enrollee, it is trying
to enroll into a network. Indicate this with the explicit inclusion of
Request to Enroll attribute with value TRUE.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
31fcea931d WPS 2.0: Add support for AuthorizedMACs attribute
Advertize list of authorized enrollee MAC addresses in Beacon and
Probe Response frames and use these when selecting the AP. In order
to provide the list, the enrollee MAC address should be specified
whenever adding a new PIN. In addition, add UUID-R into
SetSelectedRegistrar action to make it potentially easier for an AP
to figure out which ER sent the action should there be multiple ERs
using the same IP address.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f439079e93 WPS 2.0: Add new attributes and update version negotiation
This adds definitions and parsing of the new attributes that were added
in WPS 2.0. In addition, the version negotiation is updated to use the
new mechanism, i.e., accept everything received and use the new Version2
attribute in transmitted messages.
2010-09-09 06:07:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a0fad21014 Indicate Barker Preamble Mode in ERP IE also based on local configuration
While this is not strictly speaking required based on dynamic
configuration (i.e., dot11ShortPreambleOptionImplemented is static
value based on implementation, not runtime configuration), it is better
to follow local configuration parameter for short preamble in addition
to the associated station capabilities.
2010-09-05 13:11:42 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
702934a163 atheros: Fix driver deinit function to be run
hostapd uses hapd_deinit(), not deinit() wpa_driver_ops.
2010-09-05 13:04:03 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4a46e82fb4 atheros: Deinit l2_packet sock_xmit on error path 2010-09-05 13:03:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8421e95c71 Fix segfault in hostapd_eid_ht_capabilities() with some drivers
This function is not really needed in case of drivers that build the
HT IEs internally. However, since this can get called if ieee80211n=1
is set in hostapd.conf, we better not segfault even if the driver
does not provide hw info (hapd->iface->current_mode == NULL).
2010-09-05 12:47:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0caf077bc1 WPS: Fix hostapd build without CONFIG_WPS_UPNP
Commit 5a1cc30f1a added code that was
assuming CONFIG_WPS_UPNP is enabled whenever CONFIG_WPS is. Fix this
by making the UPnP calls conditional on CONFIG_WPS_UPNP define.
2010-09-05 12:34:04 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cce1f698e5 WPS: Use more defensive design to avoid theoretical NULL deref
Prior to commit 6195adda9b the sm->user
dereference did not exist here. While this is in practice non-NULL,
better use more defensive construction here to avoid NULL pointer
dereference should this ever change.
2010-09-04 21:37:36 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0c80427d77 NDIS: Fix association for WPS provisioning with protected AP
Some NDIS drivers require a workaround to allow them to associate
with a WPS AP that is already using protection (Privacy field = 1).
Let driver_ndis.c know if the AP is already using Privacy and if so,
configure a dummy WEP key to force the driver to associate.
2010-09-04 13:56:12 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f4e5fd948a l2_packet_ndis: Fix overlapped write not to corrupt stack
When using overlapped write, we must have the provided memory
areas available during the operation and cannot just use stack
unless we wait for the completion within the function. In the case
of TX here, we can easily wait for the completion since it is likely
to happen immediately. In addition, this provides more reliable
success/failure return value for l2_packet_send(). [Bug 328]
2010-09-02 13:23:14 +03:00
Helmut Schaa
36af1c7d31 hostapd: enable STBC only for STBC capable STAs
hostapd simply used its own STBC configuration in the STA's HT caps. This
resulted in TX STBC being used for STAs not supporting RX STBC, which in
turn resulted in the STA not receiving anything.

Fix this by handling the STBC flags in the same way mac80211 does. Mask
out RX STBC if we don't support TX STBC and vice versa.

Tested only with the nl80211 driver and a STBC incapable STA.

Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
2010-08-28 12:25:44 +03:00
Masashi Honma
60da5e0f3f Solaris: Add support for wired IEEE 802.1X client
This patch adds support for wired IEEE 802.1X client on the Solaris.

I have tested with these:
OS : OpenSolaris 2009.06
EAP : EAP-MD5
Switch : Cisco Catalyst 2950
2010-08-28 11:40:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
60a972a68d Add current signal strength into signal quality change events 2010-08-27 16:58:06 +03:00
Masashi Honma
9c77ad1889 trace: Fix void pointer arithmetic
The arithmetic on void pointer exists in trace routine. On GNU C, it
works because void pointer size is 1, but not all compilers behave like
this. So this patch specifies the size of the pointer.
2010-08-26 18:35:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
31fa4c6d98 Remove unused ieee802_11_send_deauth() 2010-08-25 21:18:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ef546700e2 WPS: Optimize M2 processing in AP Setup Locked case
There is no need to process the public key and generate keys if
the AP is going to reject this M2 anyway. This limits effect of
potential CPU DoS attacks in cases where AP PIN is disabled.
2010-08-24 16:42:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5a1cc30f1a WPS: Add support for dynamic AP PIN management
A new hostapd_cli command, wps_ap_pin, can now be used to manage
AP PIN at runtime. This can be used to generate a random AP PIN and
to only enable the AP PIN for short period (e.g., based on user
action on the AP device). Use of random AP PIN that is only enabled
for short duration is highly recommended to avoid security issues
with a static AP PIN.
2010-08-24 16:35:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
944814106e WPS: Do not disable AP PIN permanently, only slow down attacks
As a compromise between usability and security, do not disable
AP PIN permanently based on failed PIN validations. Instead, go to
AP Setup Locked state for increasing amount of time between each
failure to slow down brute force attacks against the AP PIN.

This avoids problems with some external Registrars that may try
to use the same PIN multiple times without user input. Now, the
user will still be able to fix the PIN and try again later while
a real attack is delayed enough to make it impractical.
2010-08-24 15:24:05 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
035cc69d98 WPS: Use WSC_NACK if no device password is known on M2 RX
This can happen on the AP if the AP PIN is not configured and
the client tries to go through the protocol instead of just using
Registrar mode to receive M1 from the AP. It is cleaner to send
out the WSC_NACK instead of just stopping the protocol.
2010-08-24 12:56:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8cbd92ee29 EAP-FAST server: Add I-ID into PAC-Info
This indicates that the peer identity is associated with the
credential and will be required to match with the identity used
during authentication when the PAC is used (RFC 5422, 4.2.4).
2010-08-19 21:16:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2e75a2b3a6 Add more debug info on deauth/disassoc events and commands 2010-08-17 21:04:38 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
43dd46b3bc Fix memory leak in AP WEP key configuration 2010-08-17 21:04:07 +03:00
Samuel Ortiz
cb1583f64b sme: Try all authentication algorithms when the first one fails
When passing several authentication algorithms through auth_alg, we
should try all of them when the first one fails. The wext driver goes
through the connect nl80211 command and the retries are then handled by
the kernel. The nl80211 doesn't and we have to handle that from
userspace.

Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com>
2010-08-17 16:39:33 +03:00
Paul Stewart
cb30b297bd nl80211: Ignore "DEAUTH" messages from APs we are not associated to
DEAUTH messages can come from a number of different sources. The one
that's hurting us currently is DEAUTH netlink messages coming to us
from compat-wireless in response to local_state_change DEAUTH messages
we sent as a part of cleaning up state in driver_nl80211's
clear_state_mismatch() function. However, DEAUTH messages can come
from a variety of unwanted sources, including directed denial-of-service
attacks (although MAC verification doesn't place that high a barrier),
so this validation is actually generically useful, I think.

The downside to this method is that without a kernel based approach
"iw dev wlan0 link" no longer works correctly after clear_state_mismatch()
is done.  This will be pursued with the kernel folks.
2010-08-16 21:27:26 +03:00
Daniel Gryniewicz
6c78ae1443 Fix RSN preauth candidate list clearing to avoid segfaults
Commit c5b26e33c1 broke the processing
of the candidate list entries when an old entry was either removed or
reused. The entry needs to be removed from the list to avoid leaving
pointers to freed memory.

http://bugs.gentoo.org/show_bug.cgi?id=330085
http://w1.fi/bugz/show_bug.cgi?id=372
2010-08-14 19:01:14 +03:00
Johannes Berg
ba2d0d7d68 nl80211: Don't pass ctx to wpa_driver_nl80211_init_nl
Currently, we don't use the sock_ctx that we get passed by eloop, so
don't assign it.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-08-11 18:33:24 +03:00
Johannes Berg
f48ffe4364 nl80211: Remove unused pending_send_action
This variable is assigned only once and never tested, so basically
unused.

Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2010-08-11 18:33:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
92afbe9d63 WPS: Make DH debug prints easier to understand 2010-08-11 18:02:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15ed5535ad nl80211: Show remain-on-channel duration in debug output 2010-08-11 18:02:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
26af9dcaef nl80211: Try mode changes multiple times to avoid some races
cfg80211/mac80211 seems to be unwilling to change interface mode in
some cases. Make these less likely to cause problems by trying the
changes up to 10 times with 100 msec intervals.
2010-08-11 18:01:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6195adda9b WPS: Allow AP to start in Enrollee mode without AP PIN for probing
In theory, this should not really be needed, but Windows 7 uses
Registrar mode to probe AP's WPS capabilities before trying to use
Enrollee and fails if the AP does not allow that probing to happen.
This allows the AP to start as an Enrollee and send M1, but refuse
to continue beyond that (M3 will not be sent if AP PIN is not known).
2010-07-26 18:12:08 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
67ccef7e6c FT: Send RRB data directly when managed by same hostapd process
This makes it easier (and a bit faster) to handle multiple local
radios with FT. There is no need to depend on l2_packet in that
case since the frame can be delivered as a direct function call.
2010-07-25 20:30:12 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
08b19cb404 WPS: Limit WPS ER event_id < 2^31 bits to avoid issues with atoi()
Previously, large event_id values (> 2^31) resulted in integer
overflow that would make ER drop all events from the AP.
2010-07-20 22:56:58 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
7f6ec672ea EAP server: Add support for configuring fragment size 2010-07-20 22:56:10 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
f3a3e6987e WPS: Allow fragment size to be configured 2010-07-20 22:55:39 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4e22adb4d1 WPS: Move from WLAN_STA_MAYBE_WPS to WLAN_STA_WPS based on EAP messages
If the station does not include WSC IE in Association Request, it
is marked with WLAN_STA_MAYBE_WPS flag. We can update that to
WLAN_STA_WPS if the station uses either of the WPS identity strings.
This enables some workarounds for WPS stations.
2010-07-18 16:10:08 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9301f6515e WPS: Reduce client timeout with EAP-WSC to avoid long wait
This works around issues with EAP-Failure getting lost for some reason.
Instead of waiting up to 60 seconds on a timeout, 30 second timeout is
now used and whenever the provisioning step has been completed (either
successfully or unsuccessfully), this timeout is reduced to 2 seconds.
2010-07-18 16:09:30 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
3239706303 WPS: Force disconnection after provisioning step
This works around some problems where the station is unable to disconnect
for some reason (e.g., if EAP-Failure gets dropped).
2010-07-18 16:08:52 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
c01106f3e8 WPS: Add more debug info for DH keys 2010-07-17 20:23:55 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b3b2da770e Define Public Action and Vendor-specific Public Action frames 2010-07-17 20:22:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
950388f745 IEEE 802.11u GAS defines 2010-07-17 20:21:39 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
4796272f5f nl80211: show TX status (ack) in debug log 2010-07-17 20:17:43 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e9501a07c6 FT: Fix RRB messages to use correct endianness
The pairwise cipher field is supposed to be little endian, but the
message building functions did not swap the bytes on big endian
hosts while the message processing functions did. Fix this by using
little endian byte order in both places.
2010-07-17 17:48:32 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2f1ce78bf7 WPS: Add a workaround for OS X 10.6.3 and .4 (use PSK, not passphrase)
It looks like 10.6.3 and 10.6.4 do not like to receive Network Key
with WPA passphrase while PSK format still works. Use peer information
from M1 to figure out whether the Enrollee is likely to be OS X and
if so, force PSK format to be used for Network Key.
2010-07-05 15:37:47 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
612e9160e2 WPS: Add a workaround for parsing M1 from OS X 10.6
It looks like Mac OS X adds unexpected 0x00 padding to the end of M1.
Skip that padding to avoid interop issues.
2010-07-05 13:04:54 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
2d8bf73298 Add new debug message level for excessive information
Some frequent debug prints are of limited use and make debug output
difficult to read. Make them use a new debug level so that -dd
provides more readable output (-ddd can now be used to enable
the excessive debug prints).
2010-07-05 12:21:48 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
cc91e07e57 OpenSSL: Fix public key length in DH group 5 operations
The length of the prime was used incorrectly and this resulted
in WPS DH operation failing whenever the public key ended up having
leading zeros (i.e., about every 1/256th time).
2010-06-26 21:03:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
41e650ae5c WPS: Use different scan result sorting rules when doing WPS provisioning
The AP configuration may change after provisioning, so it is better
not to use the current security policy to prioritize results. Instead,
use WPS Selected Registrar attribute as the main sorting key and use
signal strength next without considering security policy or rate sets.
The non-WPS provisioning case remains as-is, i.e., this change applies
only when trying to find an AP for WPS provisioning.
2010-06-11 13:50:13 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9abe9b2c35 WPS: Add workaround for missing Network Key attribute
Some deployed implementations do not include the mandatory Network
Key attribute when a WPS Credential is for an open network. Allow
this to improve interoperability since the actual key value is not
really needed for open networks.
2010-06-11 11:29:10 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9776475fb9 WPS: Do not proxy Probe Request frames to foreign SSIDs to Registrars
We must only indicate stations that are either probing the wildcard SSID
or our own SSID.
2010-06-10 22:36:34 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a63063b4f6 rfkill: Use rtnetlink ifup/ifdown events
Replace use of rfkill block event with rtnetlink ifdown. This makes
the design more robust since the rfkill event could have been for
another interface while the rtnetlink events are already filtered
based of ifindex. In addition, the new design handles other than
rfkill-triggered ifdown/ifup events, too. rfkill unblocked event
is still needed to try to set the interface back up. If the unblock
was for another interface, ifup will fail and the driver state is
not changed.
2010-05-31 18:52:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
84b2f9909f Fix driver operation order in configuration reloading
Some of the driver wrappers need to get set_ieee8021x() call before
they can configure keys. Reorder the operations in the reloading
of configuration case to match with that expectation.
2010-05-29 22:27:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7f5957abcf eloop: Fix crash on signal handler cancelling next timeout
It is possible that the timeout pointer becomes invalid in one of the
signal handlers, so we need to reload the pointer after those.
2010-05-28 22:18:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8b0ea5a07e atheros: Fix WPA/802.1X disabling to clear Privacy flag
Setting IEEE80211_PARAM_AUTHMODE to IEEE80211_AUTH_AUTO ends up enabling
Privacy mode in the driver. We need to clear that to allow hostapd to be
reconfigured into open mode.
2010-05-28 21:51:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7d6640a62c WPS ER: Add command for configuring an AP
wps_er_config can now be used to configure an AP. It is similar to
wps_er_learn, but instead of only learning the current AP settings,
it continues to send M8 with the new settings for the AP.
2010-05-28 00:01:48 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
15dbf1291a WPS ER: Add ctrl_iface event for learned AP settings 2010-05-27 15:24:45 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0848668513 WPS ER: Allow AP filtering based on IP address
wps_er_start command now takes an optional parameter that can be used
to configure a filter to only allow UPnP SSDP messages from the
specified IP address. In practice, this limits the WPS ER operations
to a single AP and filters out all other devices in the network.
2010-05-27 15:23:55 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
826fe5fec3 WPS ER: Fix Credential to use correct Enrollee MAC Address
When starting the protocol run with an Enrollee, clone the AP Settings
and replace the AP MAC Address with the Enrollee MAC Address so that the
correct value is then used in the Credential attribute in M8.
2010-05-27 15:22:44 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ed7a09f914 Add WPS IE into (Re)Association Response frame if WPS is used
If the associating station indicates that it is intents to use WPS
by including WPS IE in (Re)Association Request frame, include WPS IE
in (Re)Association Response frame.
2010-05-26 18:46:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
16e46ec043 Reassemble WPS IE(s) in (Re)Association Request if needed
Use a function that will take care of possible (though, very unlikely)
fragmentation of WPS TLVs in (Re)Association Request frames.
2010-05-26 18:17:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
99e437ad52 Fix WPS attribute parser to use correct pointer for Response Type 2010-05-26 17:12:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
32b752ef8f Internal TLS: Fix X.509 name handling to use sequency of attributes
There may be more than one attribute of same type (e.g., multiple DC
attributes), so the code needs to be able to handle that. Replace the
fixed structure with an array of attributes.
2010-05-25 20:55:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
969b403fa7 Internal TLS: Add domainComponent parser for X.509 names 2010-05-25 19:43:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5216938960 Fix memory leak on rfkill init error path 2010-05-25 12:06:25 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8c0ef18199 Fix a typo in unused attribute name 2010-05-25 09:57:22 +03:00
Masashi Honma
6db1602d5b bsd: Use set_freq() API for AP mode wpa_supplicant
Previous version driver_bsd.c switches the channel in
wpa_driver_bsd_associate(). This patch changes it to use set_freq().
I have tested this patch on FreeBSD 8.0/NetBSD 5.0.2 with hostapd,
wpa_supplicant(AP) and wpa_supplicant(STA).
2010-05-23 12:20:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8401a6b028 Add Linux rfkill support
Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used
to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even
when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g.,
due to rfkill).

Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in
blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill
events to block/unblock WLAN.
2010-05-23 10:27:32 +03:00
Andriy Tkachuk
6deb41e73f Update WPS IE on hostapd reconfiguration
This is needed to handle cases where WPS state may have changed and
hostapd is reloading its configuration.
2010-05-02 11:21:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1bc774a12a hostapd: Reorder some IEs to get closer to IEEE 802.11 standard
Vendor-specific IEs are supposed to be in the end of the frame, so move
WMM into the end of Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response
frames. In addition, move HT IEs to be later in (Re)Association
Response to match the correct order.

hostapd_eid_wpa() adds multiple IEs and the end result may not always be
correct. If WPA is enabled, WPA IE (vendor-specific) gets added in the
middle of the frame and not in the end. This would require a larger
change to spliut the IEs from WPA module into separate locations when
constructing Beacon and Probe Response frames. This is not yet addressed.
2010-05-02 10:53:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b4a1256d36 Fix fallback from failed PMKSA caching into full EAP authentication
Commit 83935317a7 added forced
disconnection in case of 4-way handshake failures. However, it should
not have changed the case where the supplicant is requesting fallback
to full EAP authentication if the PMKID in EAPOL-Key message 1/4 is
not know. This case needs to send an EAPOL-Start frame instead of
EAPOL-Key message 2/4.

This works around a problem with APs that try to force PMKSA caching
even when the client does not include PMKID in (re)association request
frame to request it. [Bug 355]
2010-05-01 17:35:28 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
439d4bf960 Fix EAPOL_SM_USES_WPA flag to be set correctly
Commit c02d52b405 removed direct calls
to the WPA authenticator, but the change here was incorrect.
EAPOL_SM_USES_WPA was supposed to be set based on sta->wpa_sm being
set, i.e., no need to check for PMKSA entries for that.

While this could potentially change EAPOL Key TX state machine behavior,
no clear problems have been identified so far. Anyway, better fix this
to get the correct flags set for EAPOL authenticator state machine.
2010-05-01 17:12:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3ab72b626b Fix WPA state machine initialization on WPA_REAUTH if needed
When using WPS, we may end up here if the STA manages to re-associate
without the previous STA entry getting removed. Consequently, we need to
make sure that the WPA state machines gets initialized properly at this
point.
2010-04-23 16:49:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
fb2ab5dd6a hostap.git is now 0.8.x development tree
0.7.x for branched into hostap-07.git for stable releases.
2010-04-18 21:01:00 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
be48214d2b Preparations for 0.7.2 release 2010-04-18 18:02:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e4cbe058d6 TNC: Add more debug infor to EAP-TNC server state changes 2010-04-18 12:24:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
11804a4ebc TNC: Fix EAP-TNC fragmentation of the last message
62477841a1 tried to address fragmentation
issues, but it did not address the case where the final EAP-TNC
message gets fragmented. Move the state update to the correct place
to address this case, too.
2010-04-18 12:21:56 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5febb0d272 TNCS: Fix uninit in error case to not double free IMVs 2010-04-18 11:10:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e0f412b927 atheros: Restore ATH_WPS_IE definition and comment 2010-04-17 21:47:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9b74812032 atheros: Add more robust and complete debug info for ioctl failures 2010-04-17 21:45:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
a317d8520e atheros: Update to build with the current driver version 2010-04-17 21:04:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2de5a860a3 Fix build without CONFIG_FULL_DYNAMIC_VLAN 2010-04-17 21:01:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7992b07f6a Remove unnecessary SUBDIRS loops from src/*/Makefile
There are no subdirectories in any of these directories or plans
for adding ones. As such, there is no point in running the loop
that does not do anything and can cause problems with some shells.
2010-04-17 17:10:31 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e34ce1683c VLAN: Reorder init to get same behavior for all VLAN interfaces
Both the wildcard VLAN entry and the statically configured VLAN
interfaces should behave in the same way. Initializing the
full dynamic VLAN code before adding the statically configured VLAN
interfaces allows the same processing to be applied to both statically
and dynamically added VLAN interface (i.e., also the statically
configured ones will be added to a bridge).
2010-04-17 09:48:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0249c988bb VLAN: Set statically configured VLAN interfaces up
This is needed to be able to bind stations to them with mac80211.
2010-04-17 09:45:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
37eb8da957 nl80211: Fix wpa_supplicant build 2010-04-16 14:13:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b9c3e576cb VLAN: Fix bridge interface clean up for no tagged_interface case 2010-04-16 01:13:46 +03:00
M. Braun
20e2cb0ae0 VLAN: Decrease bridge forwarding delay to avoid EAPOL timeouts 2010-04-16 00:48:32 +03:00
M. Braun
0ab7a701ab nl80211: Fix initial add_ifidx() realloc to not forget values
We need to make a copy of the old entries the first time the
if_indices buffer gets allocated.
2010-04-16 00:39:59 +03:00
M. Braun
97cfcf6482 nl80211: Add bridge interfaces to own ifindex list automatically
Whenever our own interface is added to a bridge, add that bridge
into the list of own interfaces.
2010-04-16 00:36:33 +03:00
M. Braun
37ba0928d5 VLAN: Set dynamic VLAN up to fix STA bind and key setup 2010-04-15 23:54:41 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
cd1d72c1d0 nl80211: Add more debug info on NL80211_ATTR_STA_VLAN failures 2010-04-15 23:46:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
4254100d6c Stop processing if STA VLAN bind fails 2010-04-15 23:44:10 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
91faf6b948 VLAN: Clean up debug code and error messages 2010-04-15 20:35:51 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c47cf42e4b WPS: Fix association when both WPS and WPA/RSN IE are included
The WPS IE was overriding the WPA/RSN IE in driver based MLME case
(hostapd_notif_assoc), but the MLME code here was not using WPS IE
correctly, i.e., it allowed the WPA/RSN IE override the operation.
2010-04-15 12:55:34 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
843123590a Fix hostapd build without WPS 2010-04-12 15:15:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0cb445a472 Fix internal DH implementation not to pad shared key
The returned buffer length was hardcoded to be the prime length
which resulted in shorter results being padded in the end. However,
the results from DH code are supposed to be unpadded (and when used
with WPS, the padding is done in WPS code and it is added to the
beginning of the buffer). This fixes WPS key derivation errors
in about 1/256 of runs ("WPS: Incorrect Authenticator") when using
the internal crypto code.
2010-04-12 12:25:21 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0544b24248 Add BSSID and reason code (if available) to disconnect event
This adds more details into the CTRL-EVENT-DISCONNECTED event to
make it easier to figure out which network was disconnected in some
race conditions and to what could have been the reason for
disconnection. The reason code is currently only available with
the nl80211 driver wrapper.
2010-04-11 21:25:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e3802622db nl80211: Define set_freq for wpa_supplicant, too 2010-04-11 20:36:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c706d5aa17 Add wpa_supplicant AP mode events for Public Action frames 2010-04-11 20:33:33 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
195420b8d1 Add WPS Registrar success callback 2010-04-11 20:21:08 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
b3db190fa2 Started to make set_ap_wps_ie() capable of adding multiple IEs
This mechanism can be used to add various IEs to Beacon and Probe
Response frames and it should be made clear that it is not reserved
only for WPS IE.
2010-04-11 20:16:43 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
087f0254d7 FT: Fix wpa_sm_set_ft_params wrapper for non-FT build 2010-04-11 19:49:32 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
814782b9fe Allow driver wrappers to indicate maximum remain-on-channel duration 2010-04-11 19:42:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
de12717a56 nl80211: Fix key configuration in wpa_supplicant AP mode 2010-04-11 19:35:24 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
bc19f67240 nl80211: Remove forgotten Action frame registration example 2010-04-11 19:32:07 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f3585c8a85 Simplify driver_ops for virtual interface add/remove
There is no absolute requirement for separating address allocation
into separate functions, so simplify the driver wrapper interface
to use just if_add and if_remove instead of adding the new
alloc_interface_addr() and release_interface_addr() functions.

if_add() can now indicate if the driver forced a different interface
name or address on the virtual interface.
2010-04-11 19:23:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
addb584881 EAP-MD5: Use conditional success decision
The server may still reject authentication at this point, so better
use conditional success decision. This allows the potentially
following EAP-Failure message to be processed properly. [Bug 354]
2010-04-11 13:43:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f8bf142175 nl80211: Fix memory leak on send_action error path 2010-04-11 12:29:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8d6399e455 Use unsigned bitfield for 1-bit values 2010-04-11 12:27:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e6ecca7737 Fix wpa_sm_has_ptk() no-WPA wrapper location 2010-04-11 11:39:14 +03:00
Yogesh Ashok Powar
721abef9b3 Allow advertising of U-APSD functionality in Beacon
hostapd does not implement UAPSD functionality. However, if U-APSD
functionality is implemented outside hostapd, add support to advertise
the functionality in beacon.

Signed-off-by: yogeshp@marvell.com
2010-04-11 11:32:15 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0f857f43df FT: Validate MDIE and FTIE in FT 4-way handshake message 2/4 2010-04-10 22:40:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0d7b44099f SME: Do not try to use FT over-the-air if PTK is not available 2010-04-10 22:39:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3b4f6dac19 FT: Verify that MDIE and FTIE matches between AssocResp and EAPOL-Key 3/4 2010-04-10 22:06:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
5af8187e11 Split EAPOL-Key msg 3/4 Key Data validation into helper functions 2010-04-10 21:55:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
86dfabb809 FT: Add FTIE, TIE[ReassocDeadline], TIE[KeyLifetime] to EAPOL-Key 3/4
These are mandatory IEs to be included in the FT 4-Way Handshake
Message 3.
2010-04-10 21:42:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
48de343cd4 Add more verbose debugging for EAPOL-Key Key Data field IEs/KDEs 2010-04-10 21:42:01 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
55046414b1 FT: Copy MDIE and FTIE from (Re)Association Response into EAPOL-Key 2/4
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008 requires that the message 2 includes FTIE and
MDIE from the AP's (Re)Association Response frame in the Key Data
field.
2010-04-10 16:48:40 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d3ccead325 Make wpa_compare_rsn_ie() handle missing IEs 2010-04-10 16:47:29 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1566ec4685 Parse EAPOL-Key msg 2/4 Key Data IEs/KDEs before checking RSN/WPA IE
This is needed to avoid incorrect validation errors on RSN/WPA IE
when using FT since there may be more than a single IE in the
Key Data field.
2010-04-10 16:46:17 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
e7846b6859 FT: Clean up wpa_sm_set_ft_params() by using common parse
Instead of parsing the IEs in the callers, use the already existing
parser in wpa_ft.c to handle MDIE and FTIE from initial MD association
response. In addition, this provides more complete access to association
response IEs to FT code which will be needed to fix FT 4-way handshake
message 2/4.
2010-04-10 11:36:35 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0ae145cde8 FT: Validate FTIE fields in Reassociation Request
ANonce, SNonce, R0KH-ID, and R1KH-ID must match with the values
used in the previous FT authentication sequence message per
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.8.4.
2010-04-09 17:14:27 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
8aaf894de2 FT: Validate protect IE count in FTIE MIC Control 2010-04-09 17:08:16 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
148fb67d5e FT: Validate SNonce and ANonce values during FT Protocol in supplicant 2010-04-09 17:02:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f4ec630d1b FT: Set FT Capability and Policy properly in MDIE during initial MD assoc
This field needs to be copied from the scan results for the AP
per IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2.
2010-04-09 16:41:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
76b7981d07 FT: Copy FT Capability and Policy to MDIE from target AP
This sets the FT Capability and Policy field in the MDIE to the values
received from the target AP (if available). This fixes the MDIE contents
during FT Protocol, but the correct value may not yet be used in initial
mobility domain association.
2010-04-09 16:26:20 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
3db6531436 FT: Add R1KH-ID into FT auth seq 3rd message (Reassoc Req)
This is a mandatory subelement per IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.8.4.
2010-04-09 16:08:50 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6e80516ab9 FT: Fix Reassociation Response in FT Protocol to include ANonce/SNonce
These values are required to be included in the frame per
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.8.5.
2010-04-09 13:36:06 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
1f6e69e07b FT: Do not add MIC to FTIE during initial MD association
We do not have any keys set at this point so there is no point in
adding the MIC. In addition, IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2
describes this frame to have MIC IE count of 0 and MIC of 0.
2010-04-09 13:30:49 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
6de513fcd3 Fix compiler warning on non-802.11r build 2010-04-08 12:25:19 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7733991281 nl80211: Start using NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE
This removes transmission of some unnecessary Deauthentication
frames in cases where we only need to clear the local state. In
addition, this resolves issues for 802.11r FT-over-DS by allowing
authentication state to be set locally even when no actual
Authentication frame is to be transmitted.
2010-04-08 11:31:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
27cf8871ad Sync with wireless-testing.git include/linux/nl80211.h
This adds NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE.
2010-04-08 11:29:54 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
39eb4d0877 FT: Fix GTK subelement format in FTIE
The Key Info field was changed from 1-octet field to 2-octet field
in 802.11r/D7.0, but that had not been updated in the implementation.
2010-04-07 23:57:39 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
26e23750b9 FT: Fix FT 4-Way Handshake to include PMKR1Name in messages 2 and 3
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2 describes FT initial mobility domain
association in an RSN to include PMKR1Name in the PMKID-List field
in RSN IE in messages 2/4 and 3/4. This makes the RSN IE not be
bitwise identical with the values used in Beacon, Probe Response,
(Re)association Request frames.

The previous versions of wpa_supplicant and hostapd did not add the
PMKR1Name value in EAPOL-Key frame and did not accept it if added
(due to bitwise comparison of RSN IEs). This commit fixes the
implementation to be compliant with the standard by adding the
PMKR1Name value into EAPOL-Key messages during FT 4-Way Handshake and
by verifying that the received value matches with the value derived
locally.

This breaks interoperability with previous wpa_supplicant/hostapd
versions.
2010-04-07 21:04:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
738a1cb286 FT: Do not include RSN IE in (Re)Assoc Resp during initial MD association
RSN IE is only supposed to be included in Reassociation Response frames
and only when they are part of a fast BSS transition.
2010-04-07 17:27:46 +03:00
Gregory Detal
bb437f282b AP: Add wpa_msg() events for EAP server state machine 2010-04-07 11:13:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
68532a9ceb Avoid hostapd segfault on invalid driver association event
Running hostapd and wpa_supplicant on the same interface at the same
time is not expected to work, but it should not cause hostapd to crash.
Ignore station mode association events (no addr field) to avoid this.
2010-04-07 10:01:49 +03:00
Andriy Tkachuk
99f4ae67b7 Fix WPA/RSN IE update on reconfig with set_generic_elem()
IF WPA/RSN parameters were changed or WPA/RSN was disabled, the
WPA/RSN IE in Beacon/Probe Response frames was only update with
set_beacon(). We need to do this with set_generic_elem(), too, to
work with all driver wrappers.
2010-04-06 20:44:26 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
643743e215 WPS: Fix WPS IE update in Beacon frames for nl80211
Call ieee802_11_set_beacon() in addition to set_ap_wps_ie() when
processing WPS IE updates. This is needed with drivers that use
set_beacon() instead of set_ap_wps_ie() (i.e., nl80211).
2010-04-06 18:04:30 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2c59362905 WPS: Add a workaround for incorrect NewWLANEventMAC format
Some ER implementation (e.g., some versions of Intel PROSet) seem to
use incorrect format for WLANEventMAC variable in PutWLANResponse.
Work around this by allowing various MAC address formats to be used
in this variable (debug message will be shown if the colon-deliminated
format specified in WFA WLANConfig 1.0 is not used).
2010-04-06 10:38:37 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
448a0a19d7 Add a more flexible version of hwaddr_aton: hwaddr_aton2()
This version of the MAC address parser allows number of different
string formats for the address (e.g., 00:11:22:33:44:55, 0011.2233.4455,
001122334455, 00-11-22-33-44-55). It returns the number of characters
used from the input string in case of success.
2010-04-06 10:37:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
81a658d754 FT: Re-set PTK on reassociation
It turns out that this is needed for both FT-over-DS and FT-over-air
when using mac80211, so it looks easiest to just unconditionally
re-configure the keys after reassociation when FT is used.
2010-04-04 09:34:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
2220821113 FT: Use bridge interface (if set) for RRB connection
This fixes receiving of RRB messages between FT APs
2010-04-04 09:31:13 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
21c9b6903e FT: Set WLAN_AUTH_FT auth_alg on FT-over-DS case
This is needed to allow reassociation processing to skip 4-way handshake
when FT-over-DS is used with an AP that has a previous association state
with the STA.
2010-04-04 09:17:57 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
d8ad6cb966 FT: Force key configuration after association in FT-over-DS
This seems to be needed at least with mac80211 when a STA is using
FT-over-DS to reassociate back to the AP when the AP still has the
previous association state.
2010-04-04 09:16:11 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
9a3cb18d74 Add AP-STA-DISCONNECT event for driver-based MLME 2010-04-04 08:14:22 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
c41a1095b5 Allow hostapd_notif_assoc() to be called with all IEs
This makes the call simpler for driver wrappers since there is no need
to parse the IEs anymore before indicating association. In addition,
this allows association processing to be extended to use other IEs
in the future.
2010-04-04 08:14:18 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
0823031750 Fix Windows compilation issues with AP mode code 2010-04-04 08:14:14 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
ade07077ec Add address to hostapd_logger output in wpa_supplicant as AP case 2010-04-04 08:14:09 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
93368ca4a2 WPS: Do not include Label in default Config Methods
This avoids conflict with both Label and Display being included at
the same time (which would make it difficult to figure out which
PIN was actually used).
2010-04-04 08:14:02 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
11356a2ab5 WPS: Fix PBC session overlap detection to use Device Password Id
Active PBC mode is indicated by Device Password Id == 4, not Config Methods
attribute.
2010-04-04 08:13:59 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
f8130b07bb driver_osx: Update set_key arguments to fix build 2010-04-04 08:13:46 +03:00
Jouni Malinen
7b1080dadd MFP: Fix IGTK PN in group rekeying
IGTK get_seqnum needs to be skipped in the same way as GTK one when
rekeying group keys. Previously, the old PN value (the one from the
previous key) was indicated and that resulted in MMIE replay detection
at the station.
2010-03-29 22:57:10 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
32d5295f9d Add a drop_sa command to allow 802.11w testing
This drops PTK and PMK without notifying the AP.
2010-03-29 15:42:04 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
358c3691cf MFP: Add SA Query Request processing in AP mode 2010-03-29 14:05:25 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b91ab76e8c Add test commands for sending deauth/disassoc without dropping state
This can be used to test 802.11w by sending a protected or unprotected
deauth/disassoc frame.

hostapd_cli deauth <dst addr> test=<0/1>
hostapd_cli disassoc <dst addr> test=<0/1>

test=0: unprotected
test=1: protected
2010-03-29 12:01:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
e820cf952f MFP: Add MFPR flag into station RSN IE if 802.11w is mandatory 2010-03-29 10:48:01 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
a042f8447d Fix ctrl_iface get-STA-MIB for WPS disabled case
The previous version would crash here on NULL pointer dereference if
WPS was disabled.
2010-03-29 09:59:16 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
b625473c6c Add driver command and event for signal strength monitoring 2010-03-28 15:31:04 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
93910401c9 nl80211: Parse CQM events 2010-03-28 13:56:40 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
d43331b6ea Sync with wireless-testing.git include/linux/nl80211.h 2010-03-28 12:47:17 -07:00
Holger Schurig
2ea2fcc7e6 nl80211: Fix WEP key configuration for prior to authentication
The driver data was changed from struct wpa_driver_nl80211_data * to
struct i802_bss * and the internal call will need to match that change.
2010-03-27 22:22:17 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
03bcb0af0d Fix wpa_auth_iface_iter() to skip BSSes without Authenticator
This could cause NULL pointer deference if multi-BSS configuration
was used with OKC in some cases.
2010-03-26 23:26:24 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
9fad706c68 nl80211: Add more debug information about scan request parameters 2010-03-26 22:22:38 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
15664ad01a nl80211: Silence set_key ENOLINK failure messages on key clearing
This happens in common case and is expected, so there is no need to
include the potentially confusing failure message in the debug log.
2010-03-26 21:58:31 -07:00
Jouni Malinen
ef580012d1 FT: Fix Authorized flag setting for FT protocol
4-way handshake or EAPOL is not used in this case, so we must
force Authorized flag to be set at the conclusion of successful
FT protocol run.
2010-03-13 21:43:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5d5a9f0021 FT: Clean EAPOL supp portValid to force re-entry to AUTHENTICATED
This fixed FT-over-DS to end up in Authorized state when the EAPOL
PAE state machine re-enters AUTHENTICATED.
2010-03-13 21:40:44 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0e84c25434 FT: Fix PTK configuration in authenticator
Must update sm->pairwise when fetching PMK-R1 SA.
Add a workaround for drivers that cannot set keys before association
(e.g., cfg80211/mac80211): retry PTK configuration after association.
2010-03-13 21:11:26 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2a7e7f4e4a FT: Add driver op for marking a STA authenticated
This can be used with FT-over-DS where FT Action frame exchange
triggers transition to State 2 (authenticated) without Authentication
frame exchange.
2010-03-13 18:28:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
86f7b62a33 FT: Add a workaround to set PTK after reassociation
If the PTK configuration prior to association fails, allow reassociation
attempt to continue and configure PTK after association. This is a
workaround for drivers that do not allow PTK to be configured before
association (e.g., current cfg80211/mac80211).
2010-03-13 17:15:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
bdda27eb17 Fix WPS IE in Probe Response frame to include proper Config Methods values
This attribute is supposed to indicate which methods the AP supports as
an Enrollee for adding external Registrars. It was left to 0 when the
AP code did not yet support external Registrars and was forgotten when
the ER support was added.
2010-03-13 13:39:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
73fc617d5c nl80211: Fix FT Action send command
Need to include payload header in the data length to avoid sending
truncated FT Action frame.
2010-03-12 00:41:03 +02:00
Masashi Honma
c1bbb0cee1 NetBSD: Fix driver_bsd.c build
On NetBSD 5.0.2, wpa_supplicant build results in messages below.

../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_get_ssid':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: warning: passing argument 2 of 'bsd_get_ssid'
from incompatible pointer type
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: warning: passing argument 3 of 'bsd_get_ssid'
makes integer from pointer without a cast
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: error: too many arguments to function
'bsd_get_ssid'
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_scan':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: warning: passing argument 2 of 'bsd_set_ssid'
from incompatible pointer type
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: warning: passing argument 3 of 'bsd_set_ssid'
makes integer from pointer without a cast
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: error: too many arguments to function
'bsd_set_ssid'
gmake: *** [../src/drivers/driver_bsd.o] Error 1

This patch solves this issue.
2010-03-10 23:33:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7b90c16aa9 nl80211: Add preliminary implementation of FT Action send
This is a step in adding FT support with nl80211-based drivers.
driver_nl80211.c is now registering to handle the FT Action frames
and is able to transmit FT Request frame. Received FT Action frames
are not yet indicated as driver events.
2010-03-07 22:47:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
1b484d60e5 FT: Include pairwise cipher suite in PMK-R0 SA and PMK-R1 SA
This is needed to fix PTK derivation to use correct length. Previously,
64-octet PTK may have been derived if the authenticator did not already
have a STA entry. Now, the correct pairwise cipher suite is learned when
then PMK-R1 SA is received.
2010-03-07 22:18:33 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
5205c4f98a nl80211: Fix driver context pointer for auth-failure-case
The new per-BSS context needs to be used here when calling
wpa_driver_nl80211_deauthenticate() to avoid passing incorrect
data type to the function.
2010-03-07 21:29:34 +02:00
Marcin Marzec
f400f4f34b Fix typo in WPA_AUTH_ALG_FT definition
This was not supposed to have duplicate value with WPA_AUTH_ALG_LEAP.
The previous version was unable to set FT as the authentication
algorithm with nl80211.
2010-03-07 21:02:55 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
0ebdf62735 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_ap_wps_ie() driver op 2010-03-07 11:51:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d3e3a20565 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_ht_params() driver op 2010-03-07 11:49:27 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3234cba40e Remove unnecessary ifname parameter to sta_set_flags() driver op 2010-03-07 11:45:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
62847751e4 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from sta_add() driver op 2010-03-07 11:42:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8709de1ae8 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from hapd_get_ssid/hapd_set_ssid 2010-03-07 11:36:45 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aa48451698 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_generic_elem() driver op 2010-03-07 11:33:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d5dd016a8a Remove unneeded ifname parameter from set_privacy() driver op 2010-03-07 11:29:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
044372a333 driver_test: Use driver private BSS context instead of BSS lookup
The ifname-based lookup can now be replaced with the new mechanism that
allows driver wrappers to register per-BSS context data.
2010-03-07 11:26:35 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
70a8419f26 Avoid crash after driver init failure
hostapd_flush_old_stations() needs to check whether the driver
initialization was successful since it gets called on an error path.
2010-03-07 11:25:28 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7ab68865c0 Remove unneeded iface parameter from if_add() driver op 2010-03-07 10:05:05 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
071799872f hostapd: fix a segfault in the error path of the nl80211 if_add function 2010-03-07 09:59:22 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
05ba8690cb nl80211: Unregister forgotten eloop socket on init failure 2010-03-06 22:37:48 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8b897f5a17 Remove unnecessary ifname parameter from set_beacon()
The new per-BSS driver context makes this unnecessary.
2010-03-06 22:36:40 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
53f3d6f3e6 hostapd: allow stations to move between different bss interfaces
With this patch, a client gets kicked out of the last BSS it was
attached to, when it is associating to a different one.
While mac80211 does allow a station to be present on multiple bss
interfaces, this does seem to cause problems both for the stack
and for hostapd.
2010-03-06 22:30:25 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
a2e40bb650 hostapd: Fix interface selection for the nl80211 driver
This patch allows the nl80211 driver to create its own per-bss context
and pass it to the drv_priv pointer of the hostapd bss state.
With this and the following patch, stations can associate to and switch
between multiple BSS interfaces of a single wiphy.
This obsoletes a few instances of passing ifname to a callback, those
can be removed in a separate patch.
It might also be useful to move more fields from the driver data to the
per-bss data structure in the future.
2010-03-06 22:22:56 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
39f42d1193 hostapd: fix bogus nl80211 interface remove messages for STA WDS 2010-03-06 20:52:22 +02:00
Felix Fietkau
4c32757d22 hostapd: add ifname to the sta_set_flags callback
This fixes multi-BSS STA operations (e.g., setting AUTHORIZED flag) with
nl80211-based drivers.
2010-03-06 20:44:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ffd2c8cd4d Avoid warnings on unused function/variables if debug is disabled
CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG removes wpa_printf() calls, so need to ifdef
some function and variable definitions to avoid compiler warnings.
2010-03-06 16:37:57 +02:00
Kel Modderman
09bd6e8cca wpa_supplicant: fix FTBFS on Debian GNU/kFreeBSD
This patch allows wpa_supplicant to compile on Debian's kfreebsd
architectures.

Patch by Stefan Lippers-Hollmann based on work done by Petr Salinger
and Emmanuel Bouthenot for 0.6.X (http://bugs.debian.org/480572).
2010-03-06 10:16:47 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d2f46a2b13 bsd: Use os_strlcpy instead of strlcpy 2010-03-06 10:04:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3812464cda Add optional scan result filter based on SSID
filter_ssids=1 global configuration parameter can now be used to
enable scan result filtering (with -Dnl80211 only for now) based on
the configured SSIDs. In other words, only the scan results that have
an SSID matching with one of the configured networks are included in the
BSS table. This can be used to reduce memory needs in environments that
have huge number of APs.
2010-03-05 21:42:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
207ef3fb12 Add suspend/resume notifications
wpa_supplicant can now be notified of suspend/resume events, e.g.,
from pm-action scripts. This allows wpa_supplicant to clear information
that may become invalid during a suspend operation.
2010-02-27 18:46:02 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94d9bfd59b Rename EAP server source files to avoid duplicate names
This makes it easier to build both EAP peer and server functionality
into the same project with some toolchains.
2010-02-19 18:54:07 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
6fa2ec2d2b Make EAPOL Authenticator buildable with Microsoft compiler 2010-02-19 18:35:40 +02:00
Masashi Honma
c6611ed995 bsd: Use device capability information
This patch enables the use of device capability information from the
driver when possible.
2010-02-16 19:47:00 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
58f6fbe05c nl80211: Add support for off-channel Action TX/RX commands
The kernel side support for this was just added into
wireless-testing.git. This commit adds the driver wrapper code needed
to allow wpa_supplicant to use the new functionality.
2010-02-16 19:41:49 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b7a2b0b68c Add alloc_interface_addr() drv op option for specifying ifname
Some drivers may need to use a specific ifname for the virtual
interface, so allow them to do this with a new parameter passed
to the alloc_interface_addr() handler.
2010-02-16 19:34:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
01b350ed74 Sync with linux/nl80211.h from wireless-testing.git 2010-02-16 19:28:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
25ac1328f6 EAP-TNC: Add Flags field into fragment acknowledgement
TNC IF-T is somewhat unclear on this are, but
draft-hanna-nea-pt-eap-00.txt, which is supposed to define the same
protocol, is clearer on the Flags field being included.

This change breaks interoperability with the old implementation if
EAP-TNC fragmentation is used. The old version would not accept
the acknowledgement message with the added Flags octet while the
new version accepts messagss with with both options.
2010-02-14 16:08:15 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
62477841a1 EAP-TNC server: Fix processing when last message is fragmented
If the last message from the EAP-TNC server was fragmented, the
fragment processing lost the DONE/FAIL state and did not know how
to handle the final ACK from the peer. Fix this by remembering the
earlier DONE/FAIL state when fragmenting a frame.
2010-02-13 18:03:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b29d086d50 EAP-TNC: Accept fragment ack frame with Flags field
TNC IF-T specification is unclear on the exact contents of the fragment
acknowledgement frame. An interoperability issue with the tncs@fhh
implementation was reported by Arne Welzel
<arne.welzel@stud.fh-hannover.de> due to the different interpretations
of the specification. Relax EAP-TNC server/peer validation rules to
accept fragmentation acknowledgement frames to include the Flags field
to avoid this issue.
2010-02-13 18:00:39 +02:00
Masashi Honma
0c6bdf91ea bsd: Aggregate ioctl routines
This patch aggregates ioctls.

First is SIOCS80211. The SIOCS80211's arguments has 3 couples.
        1-1. i_len, i_data
        1-2. i_val
        1-3. i_len, i_data, i_val (currently only IEEE80211_IOC_APPIE)
There were 3 routines for each cases. This patch aggregates these to
one.

Second is SIOCG80211. The SIOCG80211 returns 2 type of value.
        2-1. i_len
        2-2. i_val
There were 2 routines for each cases. This patch aggregates these to
one.

I have tested on both FreeBSD 8.0 and NetBSD 5.0.1 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:59:29 +02:00
Masashi Honma
88487b0e0b FreeBSD: Add support for FreeBSD 8.0 STA/AP
This patch adds both wpa_supplicant and hostapd support for
FreeBSD 8.0.

I refered
http://www.jp.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/src/usr.sbin/wpa/hostapd/driver_freebsd
.c
http://www.jp.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/src/usr.sbin/wpa/wpa_supplicant/driver_
freebsd.c

I have tested on FreeBSD 8.0 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:57:39 +02:00
Masashi Honma
362468d117 FreeBSD: Enable channel control
This patch enables FreeBSD channel control.

I have tested on FreeBSD 7.2 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:54:27 +02:00
Masashi Honma
e1b1309b6a bsd: Unify wpa_driver_bsd_ops
The attached patch unifies hostapd wpa_driver_bsd_ops and
wpa_supplicant wpa_driver_bsd_ops.

I have tested on NetBSD 5.0.1 with these cases.

[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)

[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
2010-02-13 13:52:03 +02:00
Masashi Honma
86b24ea93c bsd: Unify struct bsd_driver_data and struct wpa_driver_bsd_data
This patch unifies struct bsd_driver_data and struct wpa_driver_bsd_data.
2010-02-13 13:50:19 +02:00
Masashi Honma
6850c70742 bsd: Use same field name between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
This patch modifies field name of struct bsd_driver_data to use
same name of struct wpa_driver_bsd_data. This is a preparation of
unifying struct bsd_driver_data and struct wpa_driver_bsd_data.
2010-02-13 13:48:52 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
00468b4650 Add TLS client events, server probing, and srv cert matching
This allows external programs (e.g., UI) to get more information
about server certificate chain used during TLS handshake. This can
be used both to automatically probe the authentication server to
figure out most likely network configuration and to get information
about reasons for failed authentications.

The follow new control interface events are used for this:
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-TLS-CERT-ERROR

In addition, there is now an option for matching the server certificate
instead of the full certificate chain for cases where a trusted CA is
not configured or even known. This can be used, e.g., by first probing
the network and learning the server certificate hash based on the new
events and then adding a network configuration with the server
certificate hash after user have accepted it. Future connections will
then be allowed as long as the same server certificate is used.

Authentication server probing can be done, e.g., with following
configuration options:
    eap=TTLS PEAP TLS
    identity=""
    ca_cert="probe://"

Example set of control events for this:
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-STARTED EAP authentication started
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PROPOSED-METHOD vendor=0 method=21
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-METHOD EAP vendor 0 method 21 (TTLS) selected
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT depth=0 subject='/C=US/ST=California/L=San Francisco/CN=Server/emailAddress=server@kir.nu' hash=5a1bc1296205e6fdbe3979728efe3920798885c1c4590b5f90f43222d239ca6a
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-TLS-CERT-ERROR reason=8 depth=0 subject='/C=US/ST=California/L=San Francisco/CN=Server/emailAddress=server@kir.nu' err='Server certificate chain probe'
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-FAILURE EAP authentication failed

Server certificate matching is configured with ca_cert, e.g.:
    ca_cert="hash://server/sha256/5a1bc1296205e6fdbe3979728efe3920798885c1c4590b5f90f43222d239ca6a"

This functionality is currently available only with OpenSSL. Other
TLS libraries (including internal implementation) may be added in
the future.
2010-02-13 11:14:23 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c7d711609b Fix memory leak on TLS setup error path
Need tof free TLS context in some cases to avoid a memory leak
on error path.
2010-02-13 10:19:41 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
2e06e9dd6f Fix TLS in/out buffer freeing
The previous version could end leaking memory since os_free() was used
instead of wpabuf_free(). In addition, this could potentially have
triggered a crash if the TLS context were being freed when pending
input data where still in the buffer (though, this may not be possible
to trigger in practice).
2010-02-12 21:13:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
cf123d7f4c OpenSSL: Fix tls_init(NULL) with FIPS-enabled build
The conf argument to tls_init() may be NULL (as it is when using
hostapd), so we must check that here before dereferencing the
pointer.
2010-02-12 20:51:10 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e0b3b3cb77 WPS: Fix AP operation with internal Registrar when ER is also active
Ignore the pending WPS message from ER (PutWLANReseponse action) if the
internal Registrar has already sent out M2.
2010-02-12 12:38:14 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
7796f20edc Add new ctrl_iface event for EAP methods proposed by the server
This makes it easier for external programs to probe EAP server
preferences and potentially automatically detect which method
could be used.
2010-02-11 19:48:36 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e748062b58 nl80211: Do not try to remove non-existing STA WDS interface
This removes confusing error messages from the default (no WDS) case.
2010-02-10 11:29:53 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
aba7569ec8 driver_bsd: Fix build without SIOCS80211CHANNEL
At least FreeBSD 7 does not seem to define this and failed to build
after the previous changes.
2010-02-08 21:41:51 +02:00
Masashi Honma
42f34a9b41 driver_bsd.c: Enable AP mode wpa_supplicant 2010-02-08 21:33:59 +02:00
Masashi Honma
d373725686 driver_bsd: Clean up EAPOL frame transmission code
The bsd_send_eapol() adds Ethernet header by itself. This patch changes it
to use l2_packet functionality.

I have tested on NetBSD 5.0.1 with WPA-PSK(TKIP).
2010-02-08 21:28:59 +02:00
Masashi Honma
719196b159 driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (setkey)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
for IEEE80211_IOC_WPAKEY.
2010-02-08 21:25:18 +02:00
Masashi Honma
60bc30333c driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (ifflag)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
for SIOC[GS]IFFLAGS.
2010-02-08 21:23:28 +02:00
Masashi Honma
fa6b8afe6f driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (MLME)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
about IEEE80211_IOC_MLME. This is a preparation for AP mode
wpa_supplicant.
2010-02-08 21:21:23 +02:00
Masashi Honma
cbdecd2b0d driver_bsd.c: Reduce code duplication (DELKEY)
This patch reduces code duplication between hostapd and wpa_supplicant
about IEEE80211_IOC_DELKEY. This is a preparation for AP mode
wpa_supplicant. This is a patch to
http://lists.shmoo.com/pipermail/hostap/2010-January/021030.html.
2010-02-08 21:18:09 +02:00
Masashi Honma
5197244a04 bsd: Enable auto configuration
On NetBSD, we should configure some parameters manually out of hostapd
like below.

  ifconfig ath0 mediaopt hostap
  ifconfig ath0 mode 11g
  ifconfig ath0 chan 6

This patch does these automatically. Maybe there will be some
objections, like "hardware configuration is not hostapd/wpa_supplican's
work". So I will write the reasons why I made this patch.

1. For usability.
2. The first command fails when previous state is adhoc. This patch is
free from previous state.
3. Some driver wrappers configure these automatically (like nl80211).
4. I have wasted time trying to find out these command were needed :(
2010-02-08 21:14:22 +02:00
Masashi Honma
82f36163ac driver_bsd.c: Use os_free() instead of free()
This patch replaces some free() with os_free() when the memory was
allocated by os_*().
2010-02-08 21:11:52 +02:00
Hamish Guthrie
79e4140c61 driver_ps3: Remove legacy ps3 wpa driver
The ps3 wireless kernel driver has wireless extension support.
There is a legacy wpa_supplicant driver, and support for this
has been removed from the kernel driver, as no distributions
are using it.
2010-02-08 21:08:54 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8856462d61 nl80211: Dump scan results in debug log if association command fails
This may help in debugging why cfg80211 refused the association
command since the scan results should include information about all
pending authentication and association states.
2010-01-24 18:11:30 -08:00
Jouni Malinen
582507be85 nl80211: Clear cfg80211 authentication data for old entries
cfg80211 has a limit on pending authentications, so we better clear
the entries that we do not care about to avoid hitting the limit
when roaming between multiple APs.
2010-01-24 18:07:34 -08:00
Christian Lamparter
43a7fe2e0e ap: Reorder authsrv_init() to fix IEEE 802.1X initialization
This patch moves the authentication server setup before
IEEE 802.1X initialization. It's because 802.1X already
needs to have a valid SSL context.

Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
2010-01-17 12:14:17 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
dff0f701d0 Preparations for v0.7.1 release 2010-01-16 19:04:38 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
de1b2d143a Make sure the resutl from readlink is properly null terminated 2010-01-16 17:19:06 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
8c0906542c Fetch IEs from both Beacon and Probe Response frames if available
This allows the driver wrappers to return two sets of IEs, so that
the BSS code can use information from both Beacon and Probe Response
frames if needed. For example, some Cisco APs seem to include more
information in Wireless Provisioning Services IE when it is in the
Beacon frame.
2010-01-16 16:11:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
94627f6cc8 hostapd: Detect bridge interface automatically
This makes the bridge parameter unnecessary for cases where the interface
is already in a bridge and sysfs is mounted to /sys so that the detection
code works.

For nl80211, the bridge parameter can be used to request the AP
interface to be added to the bridge automatically (brctl may refuse to
do this before hostapd has been started to change the interface mode).
If needed, the bridge interface is also created.
2010-01-16 15:19:58 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
d455d0806e driver_test: Learn scan result channel from DS Params IE 2010-01-16 12:26:03 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
c35faef51a driver_test: Initialize bss_ctx based on drv->ctx for new BSS interfaces
This is needed with wpa_supplicant to get the correct context pointer
for a virtual BSS interface.
2010-01-16 12:24:31 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
37b776eac1 driver_test: Add support for per-SSID scans for non-MLME case 2010-01-16 12:23:39 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
af47308823 Add deinit_ap driver op to help wpa_supplicant AP mode use 2010-01-16 12:20:51 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
e882899981 Add BSSID to TX/RX Action frame driver ops
This meets better the needs for various Public Action frame use cases.
2010-01-16 12:16:20 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4e5cb1a366 Add driver op for disabling 802.11b rates 2010-01-16 12:11:19 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
ae58592894 Sync with wireless-testing.git linux/nl80211.h 2010-01-16 12:06:42 +02:00
Masashi Honma
11386396cc driver_bsd.c: Clean up EAPOL frame transmission code
The bsd_send_eapol() prepares 3000 bytes buffer for every EAPOL
frame transmission. I think malloc() is better way for efficient
memory use.
2010-01-16 11:47:05 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
b590812e8f Add preliminary documentation for ctrl_iface events 2010-01-15 19:24:08 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
3145e6154c wext: Add cfg80211-specific optimization to avoid silly behavior
If the driver is detected to use cfg80211, we can rely on it being able
to disconnect with SIOCSIWMLME commands and to use empty SSID as a way
to stop it from associating when we are in progress of configuring the
driver for association. Consequently, we can remove the hack that uses
random 32-octet SSID to force disconnection and re-order association
commands to match the expectations that cfg80211 has for WEXT ioctls.
This gets rid of extra scan rounds and attempts to associate with the
silly 32-octet SSID.
2010-01-12 20:01:09 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
4a5869206e wext: Check hexstr2bin() return value in custom scan text processing 2010-01-10 22:26:11 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
a7efb16052 WEXT: Show BSSID/SSID set failures on disconnect in debug log 2010-01-10 22:18:50 +02:00
Jouni Malinen
fbe3e7f840 wext: Check hexstr2bin() return value 2010-01-10 22:16:51 +02:00